TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving 2 When

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving 2 When
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for US owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Index
Before driving
1-5. Refueling........................................ 69
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 69
1-1. Key information ........................... 22
1-6. Theft deterrent system............... 72
Keys ...................................................... 22
Engine immobilizer system......... 72
Alarm.................................................... 74
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.)............................................. 77
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors ...................... 24
Wireless remote control .............. 24
Side doors .......................................... 27
Back door........................................... 32
1-7. Safety information....................... 78
Correct driving posture ............... 78
SRS airbags ...................................... 80
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................... 92
Child restraint systems ................. 97
Installing child restraints............. 100
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel, etc.)................. 37
Front seats.......................................... 37
Rear seats........................................... 40
Driving position memory ............. 43
Head restraints................................. 45
Seat belts ............................................ 47
Steering wheel
(manually adjustable type) ....... 55
Steering wheel
(power-adjustable type)............ 56
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ................................................ 57
Outside rear view mirrors.......... 58
Roof luggage carrier ..................... 60
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof .......... 62
Power windows................................ 62
Moon roof .......................................... 65
2
2
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures.................... 112
Driving the vehicle.......................... 112
Engine (ignition) switch .............. 120
Automatic Transmission ............ 123
Turn signal lever............................. 128
Parking brake ................................. 129
2-2. Instrument cluster ..................... 130
Gauges and meters ..................... 130
Indicators and warning lights ... 132
Trip information display.............. 136
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers.................... 139
Headlight switch............................ 139
Fog light switch .............................. 142
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 143
Rear window wiper and
washer............................................. 148
Headlight cleaner switch ........... 149
2-4. Using other driving
systems ...................................... 150
Cruise control ................................ 150
Dynamic laser cruise control ... 154
Driving assist systems.................. 164
Electronically modulated
air suspension .............................. 169
2-5. Driving information ................... 174
Off-road precautions .................. 174
Cargo and luggage...................... 179
Vehicle load limits......................... 182
Winter driving tips ........................ 183
Trailer towing.................................. 188
Dinghy towing ................................ 198
3
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning
1
system and defogger............ 200
Automatic air
conditioning system ................ 200
Rear window and outside rear
2
view mirror defoggers, and
windshield wiper de-icer........ 206
3-2. Using the front audio
3
system ....................................... 207
Audio system type ....................... 207
Using the radio.............................. 209
Using the CD player.................... 216 4
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs.................................. 222
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................ 230 5
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............................ 233
3-3. Using the rear audio
6
system ....................................... 235
Rear seat entertainment
system features .......................... 235
7
Using the DVD player
(DVD video)................................. 241
Using the DVD player
(video CD)................................... 248
Using the DVD player
(audio CD/ CD text).............. 250
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
Using the DVD player
(MP3 discs) .................................. 251
Using the video mode ................ 253
Changing the initial setting ...... 255
3-4. Using the interior lights .......... 262
Interior lights list............................ 262
• Interior lights ............................... 265
• Personal lights ............................ 266
3-5. Using the storage features .... 267
List of storage features............... 267
• Glove box..................................... 267
• Console boxes .......................... 268
• Overhead console.................... 270
• Cup holders.................................. 271
• Door pockets.............................. 272
3-6. Other interior features........... 274
Sun visors......................................... 274
Vanity mirror.................................. 275
Clock................................................. 276
Outside temperature
display ............................................ 277
Multi-display light control......... 278
Power outlet................................... 279
Seat heaters.................................... 282
Armrest ........................................... 284
Floor mat......................................... 285
Luggage compartment
features......................................... 286
Garage door opener................. 289
Compass.......................................... 294
4
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care........... 300
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 300
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior................... 303
4-2. Maintenance.............................. 306
Maintenance requirements .... 306
General maintenance............... 308
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ......................................... 311
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance............................. 312
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................... 312
Hood................................................... 315
Positioning a floor jack................ 316
Engine compartment................... 318
Tires ................................................... 332
Tire inflation pressure................ 340
Wheels.............................................. 344
Air conditioning filter.................. 346
Wireless remote control
battery............................................ 349
Rear seat entertainment
system controller........................ 351
Checking and replacing
fuses............................................... 353
Headlight aim (vehicles with
discharge headlights).............. 365
Light bulbs....................................... 366
6
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications............................ 422
5
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information .............. 380
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ...................................... 380
If you think something
is wrong......................................... 387
Fuel pump shut off system ....... 388
Event data recorder................... 389
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency ................................ 391
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ......................................... 391
If you have a flat tire..................... 402
If the engine will not start ........... 412
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P............................... 413
If you lose your keys..................... 414
If the vehicle battery is
discharged .................................... 415
If your vehicle overheats ............ 418
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................................ 420
1
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 422
Fuel information............................ 433
Tire information ............................ 436 2
6-2. Customization ........................... 447
Customizable features .............. 447
3
6-3. Initialization ................................ 451
Items to initialize ............................ 451
7
4
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................... 454 5
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 455
6
Index
Abbreviation list .................................. 460 7
Alphabetical index.............................. 462
What to do if... ...................................... 473
5
Pictorial index
Exterior
Windshield wipers P. 143
Outside rear view mirrors P. 58
Parking lights P. 139
Moon roof  P. 65
Hood P. 315
Turn signal lights P. 128
Side marker lights P. 139
Fog lights P. 142
Headlights (low beam) P. 139
Headlights (high beam) P. 139
6
Roof luggage carrier  P. 60
Rear window defogger P. 206
Tail lights P. 139
Back door P. 32
Side doors
Rear window wiper P. 148
P. 27
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
License plate lights
P. 332
P. 402
P. 139
Side marker lights P. 139
P. 430
Turn signal lights P. 128
P. 436
Fuel filler door P. 69
: If equipped
7
Pictorial index
Seat belts
Interior
Door pockets P. 272
P. 47
Head restraints P. 45
Front seats
Floor mat P. 285
Power window switches
P. 62
SRS driver airbag
P. 80
Rear seats P. 40
SRS driver knee airbag
A
Armrest P. 284
Console box  P. 268
Cup holders P. 271
8
P. 37
P. 80
SRS side airbags P. 80
Console box P. 268
Armrest P. 284
SRS front passenger
airbag P. 80
Cup holders P. 271
A
Overhead console P. 270
Personal lights P. 266
Interior lights P. 265
Rear seat entertainment system 
P. 235
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 80
Garage door opener switches P. 289
Moon roof switches  P. 65
Vanity mirrors P. 275
Sun visors P. 274
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 57
Compass P. 294
: If equipped
9
Pictorial index
Interior
B
Inside door lock button
P. 27
Driving position memory switches  P. 43
Door lock switch
P. 27
Window lock switch P. 62
Power window switches P. 62
10
C
Power outlet
Height select switch 
Headlight cleaner switch 
Seat heater switches 
P. 279
P. 169
P. 149
Automatic transmission
shift lever P. 123
P. 282
Shift lock override
button P. 413
ECT SNOW switch P. 125
Power outlet P. 279
: If equipped
11
Pictorial index
Luggage compartment
Power outlet P. 279
Auxiliary box P. 286
Luggage cover P. 287
Luggage compartment light P. 34
A/V input adapter  P. 253
A
Cargo hooks P. 286
Power outlet  P. 279
Shopping bag hooks P. 286
Cargo hooks P. 286
Luggage compartment light P. 34
12
A
Power back door switch  P. 32
Luggage compartment light P. 34
: If equipped
13
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Headlight switch P. 139
Turn signal lever P. 128
Fog light switch P. 142
Tire pressure warning select switch P. 335
Glove box P. 267
Power back door main switch  P. 33
Windshield wipers and washer switch P. 143
Rear window wiper and washer switch P. 148
Engine (ignition) switch P. 120
Gauges and meters P. 130
Audio remote control switches P. 233
Tilt steering lock release lever  P. 55
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch  P. 56
Parking brake pedal P. 129
Hood release lever P. 315
14
A
Without navigation system
Multi-display light
control button
P. 278
Multi-display
●Trip information display
P. 136
●Outside temperature
display P. 277
●Clock P. 276
Security indicator
P. 72, 74
●Automatic air conditioning display P. 200
Air conditioning system
P. 200
Audio system
P. 207
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers, and windshield wiper de-icer  P. 206
Trip information display
control button P. 136
With navigation system
Security indicator
P. 72, 74
Audio system*
Rear view monitor/
navigation system*
Air conditioning
system*
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers, and windshield wiper de-icer  P. 206
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
15
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
B
Telephone switch*
Speech command switch*
Distance switch  P. 156
Cruise control switch P. 150, 154
C
Tire pressure warning reset switch P. 333
Height control switch  P. 171
16
VSC OFF switch P. 165
D
Cup holder P. 271
Easy access mode switch  P. 170
Instrument panel light
control knob P. 131
ODO/TRIP button P. 130
Power back door switch 
P. 32
AFS OFF switch  P. 140
Power outlet main switch 
P. 279
Fuel filler door opener P. 69
Outside rear view mirror switches P. 58
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
17
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for
precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
18
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
19
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
20
Before driving
1-1. Key information ............... 22
Keys............................................... 22
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors ........... 24
1
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and
moon roof ........................ 62
Power windows.......................... 62
Moon roof ................................... 65
Wireless remote control......... 24
Side doors.................................... 27
1-5. Refueling .......................... 69
Back door ................................... 32
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 69
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel, etc.)...... 37
1-6. Theft deterrent system .... 72
Front seats................................... 37
Alarm............................................. 74
Rear seats................................... 40
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.)...................................... 77
Driving position memory........ 43
Engine immobilizer
system........................................ 72
Head restraints .......................... 45
Seat belts ..................................... 47
1-7. Safety information........... 78
Steering wheel
(manually adjustable
type) ........................................... 55
Correct driving posture ......... 78
Steering wheel
(power-adjustable type) ....... 56
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 57
SRS airbags ................................ 80
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............. 92
Child restraint systems ........... 97
Installing child restraints....... 100
Outside rear view mirrors..... 58
Roof luggage carrier................ 60
21
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles with power back door system
Vehicles without power back door system
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
Flat key
22
1-1. Key information
■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. ( P. 267)
Carry the master key for your own use and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
1
■ Key number plate
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by
placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that
blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
● Do not disassemble the key.
23
Before driving
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number
plate. (P. 414)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock/unlock the vehicle and
open/close the back door from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles with power back door
Locks all doors
Sounds alarm (P. 74)
Push and hold.
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
standard moon roof
Push and hold.
Opens and closes the back
door
Push and hold.
Vehicles without power back door
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
standard moon roof
Push and hold.
Sounds alarm (P. 74)
Push and hold.
24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Back door operation
The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door again when
you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been
opened and then closed.
1
■ Operation signals
Back door: A buzzer sounds twice and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.
Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows
and standard moon roof are operating.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the
door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once
more.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Battery depletion
P. 349
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
■ Reversing the operation of the power back door
Pressing the wireless remote control switch again while the power back door is
operating will cause the operation to reverse. However, the reverse operation cannot be performed for the first second after automatic operation starts, even if the
wireless remote control switch is pressed again.
25
Before driving
Side doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ12BBT
FCC ID: HYQ13BBT
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio-TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using a key, wireless remote control or door lock switch.
■ Key
1
Before driving
Locks all doors
Closes the windows and
standard moon roof (turn and
hold)
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlocks the
driver’s door. Turning the key
again unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
standard moon roof (turn and
hold)
■ Wireless remote control
P. 24
■ Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and the key
is in the engine switch.
Rear door child-protector lock
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle
when the locks are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the engine
switch to the LOCK position.
1
Before driving
Function
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
STEP 2
Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the ON position.
(Perform the step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then
release.
The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Function
Shift lever position
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Switch position
P
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Before driving
● Always use a seat belt.
1
● Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
The back door can be opened using the back door opener.
In addition, the power back door can be opened/closed using the power
back door switch or wireless remote control.
■ Back door opener
Push up
Raise
■ Power back door switches (vehicles with power back door)
Instrument panel
Pull down the cover.
Push the switch for 1 second
to open/close.
Pressing the switch again while
the power back door is operating will cause the operation to
reverse.
However, the reverse operation
cannot be performed for the
first second after pressing the
switch to operate the door.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
Push the switch to close.
Pressing the switch again while
the power back door is closing
will cause it to open again.
1
Before driving
However, the reverse operation
cannot be performed for the
first second after pressing the
switch to close the door.
The back door can be opened even if it is locked. Lock the back door
again when you leave the vehicle. The back door will not lock automatically after it has been opened and then closed.
A buzzer sounds twice and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door has been opened/closed.
■ Wireless remote control (vehicles with power back door)
P. 24
Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with power back door)
Turn off the main switch in the
glove box to disable the power
back door system.
ON
OFF
The back door cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote control or power back door switch.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ Luggage compartment light
The luggage compartment light turns on
when the back door is opened and the light
switch is ON.
■ Back door handle
Use the back door handle when closing.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power back
door, the back door automatically pulls
closed in the event that the door is not properly latched when closed.
■ If the back door opener is inoperative
The back door can be opened from the inside.
34
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
STEP 2
Push the lever.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■ The power back door can be opened when
The engine switch is in the ON position, and the shift lever is in P.
■ Jam protection function
If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door
will automatically operate in the opposite direction.
The back door must be initialized. To initialize, close the back door completely by
hand.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. beep sound) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 447)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Falling to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Keep the back door closed while driving
If the back door is opening, the luggage will be thrown out and exhaust gases will be
entered in the vehicle.
■ When the back door is opened while parking
The open back door hides the rear lights. Other road users must be warned of the
presence of your vehicle by a warning triangle or other device.
■ Operating the power back door
● Check to make sure that passengers do not have any part of their body in a posi-
tion where it could be caught or hit when the back door is being operated.
● Careful attention is needed so as not to get your fingers trapped as the back door
automatically closes when it has not been fully closed.
● Do not allow children to operate the back door.
Closing the back door on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
35
Before driving
■ If the power back door does not work
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the back door
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the back door components
● Do not apply any force, paint or let any other foreign matter on the damper.
● Do not apply excessive force when the back door closer is operating.
● Make sure there is nothing in the doorway before closing.
36
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Front seats
1
Before driving
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
Flattening seatback
■ Before flattening seatbacks
Slide the rear seats as far back as possible. (P. 40)
37
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ Flattening seatbacks
STEP 1
Move the seat forward, raise the
seat, and remove the headrestraint.
After returning the seat to its original position, be certain to replace
the head restraint.
STEP 2
STEP 3
38
Move the seatback angle control
switch backward to flatten the
seatback.
Push the vertical height adjustment
switch downward.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
■ When adjusting the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat
Do not operate the front passenger’s seat when a passenger is seated in it. In addition, do not let anyone sit down in the front passenger’s seat while the seat is being
operated. The front passenger may catch their legs between the instrument panel
and seat, resulting in injury.
■ While driving
Do not allow passengers to ride on the flattened seat.
39
1
Before driving
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce
the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Rear seats
Seat position lever
Seatback angle lever
Folding down rear seatbacks
■ Before folding down rear seatbacks
Stow the rear seat belt buckles.
40
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Use the seat belt hangers to prevent the belts from being tangled.
1
Pulling the seatback angle lever
and fold them down until they lock.
When return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, unlock the
seatbacks by pulling the seatback
angle lever and lift them up until
they lock.
■ Folding down rear center seatback only
Pulling the center seatback angle
lever behind the seatback and fold
it down.
When return the rear center seatback to its original position, lift it up
until it locks.
41
Before driving
■ Folding down rear seatbacks
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to
reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt
may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury
in the event of an accident.
● Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box and the
rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.
■ When returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious
injury.
● Press forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.
● Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.
NOTICE
■ Stowing the seatbelts
The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the rear seatbacks.
42
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Driving position memory (if equipped)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button.
Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.
1
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
While pushing the SET button,
push button 1 or 2 until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
Push button 1 or 2 to recall the
memorized position.
43
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ Retained accessory power
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up
to 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even if the key is removed from the
engine switch.
■ If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being mode
The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the desired button (1 or 2)
again.
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
44
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Head restraints
Vertical adjustment
Up
Down
1
Before driving
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Angle adjustment (front seats
only)
45
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ Removing the head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the
lock release button.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint to the lock position when using.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
46
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
1
Before driving
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
47
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a person's neck, use the seat belt comfort
guide.
STEP 1
Pull the comfort guide from the
pocket.
STEP 2
Slide the belt past the slot of the
guide.
The elastic cord must be behind
the seat belt.
48
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
STEP 3
Buckle, position and release the
seat belt.
1
Before driving
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
49
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 100)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 47)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 47)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become large
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 47 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
51
Before driving
enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 97)
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in a collision. (P. 48)
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur-
ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be
used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt comfort guide
● Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must be
behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.
● To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop while driv-
ing, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket when it is not in use.
● Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the shoul-
der. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not fall off the shoulder.
Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
53
1
Before driving
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs
and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or injury in the event of a collision.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Steering wheel (manually adjustable type)
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
STEP 1
STEP 2
1
Before driving
STEP 3
Hold the steering wheel
and pull up the lever.
Adjust to the ideal position by moving the
steering wheel.
Release the lever.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Steering wheel (power-adjustable type)
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
Auto tilt away
When the key is removed from the
engine switch, the steering wheel
returns to its stowed position by
moving up and away to enable
easier driver entry and exit.
Inserting the key into the engine
switch returns the steering wheel
to its original position.
■ Customization
Setting of the auto tilt-away function can be disabled. (P. 447)
Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.
To turn automatic mode ON/
OFF, press and hold the
switch for 3 seconds.
1
Before driving
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned ON.
The anti-glare mirror default
mode is automatic. The antiglare mirror is automatically set
to automatic whenever the
engine switch is in the ON position.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover it.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the engine switch is in
the ACC or ON position.
Pull down the cover
Select a mirror to adjust
(L: left or R: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 206)
■ Folding back the mirrors
Push back in the direction of the vehicle's
rear.
■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
(vehicles with driving position memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch
of a button. (P. 43)
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between L and
R).
1
■ Auto anti-glare function
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.
59
Before driving
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 57)
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)
Cross rails
Roof rails
Adjusting the position of cross rails
STEP 1
STEP 2
60
Pull the lock release lever up to
release the cross rails.
Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for loading luggage
and release the lever.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel, etc.)
CAUTION
■ Cross rail adjustment
■ When loading cargo
Observe the following precautions.
● Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear
axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.
(P. 422)
● Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage car-
rier.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
● If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle
now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
● Do not exceed 165 lb. (75 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.
NOTICE
■ When loading the luggage
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
61
1
Before driving
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward
them.
Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
One-touch closing*
Closing
One-touch opening*
Opening
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
62
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
■ Linked door lock window operation
1
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the key. (P. 27)
■ Retained accessory power
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. They cannot, however, be
operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ If the power window does not work correctly
The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation. (Perform for each window with the switch for each seat.)
STEP 1 Open the window halfway.
STEP 2 Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the
switch for one second.
The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on when initial
settings are complete.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
63
Before driving
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 24)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
64
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof (if equipped)
Use the overhead switches to open, close and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■ Opening and closing
Standard type
1
Before driving
Open
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened position.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close
Push the switch in the either direction to stop the moon roof partway.
Multi-panel type
Open
Closes the center and rear
panels
Closes the front panel
(push and hold)
Push the switch in the either direction to stop the moon roof partway.
65
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ Tilting up and down
Standard type
Tilt up
Tilt down
Push the switch in the either side to
stop the moon roof partway.
Multi-panel type
Tilt up
Push the switch in the either side to
stop the moon roof partway.
Tilt down (push and hold)
66
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■ Linked door lock moon roof operation (standard type)
1
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the key. (P. 27)
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK
position
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
engine switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Open moon roof reminder buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the moon roof is left open when you turn the engine switch to
the ACC or LOCK position and open the driver's door.
■ If the moon roof does not work correctly (Multi-panel type only)
The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
Push until the front panel fully closes.
Hold for about 1 second.
■ To reduce moon roof wind noise
Drive with the moon roof where it has stopped when opening automatically.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
67
Before driving
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 24)
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
NOTICE
■ When opening the moon roof (multi-panel type)
● Before opening the moon roof, make sure the radio antenna is in the lock posi-
tion.
Otherwise, the antenna may get caught between the moon roof and frame.
● There is the possibility that water or rain will get into the vehicle if you operate the
moon roof after a rainfall, snowfall or car wash. Wipe the moon roof dry with a
cloth before operating it.
68
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Stop the engine and ensure that all the doors and windows are
closed.
1
STEP 1
Push the fuel filler door opener.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
Before driving
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
69
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until one clicking sound is
heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
■ Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 Imp. gal.)
■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The handle can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch because the battery is
discharged or for any other reason.
70
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may
result in death or serious injury.
1
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
71
Before driving
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed from
the engine switch to indicate
that the system is operating.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with
a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY (Made in Japan)
FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY (Made in Canada)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
72
1-6. Theft deterrent system
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
73
Before driving
CAUTION
1
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■ Triggered of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations.
● A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using
a key or wireless remote door lock function with the alarm being
set.
● The hood is opened with the alarm being set.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, hood, and lock
all doors using a key or wireless
remote door lock function. The
system will be set automatically
after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
● Unlock the doors using the key or the wireless remote control.
● Turn the engine switch to the ON position. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
74
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following.
1
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
Before driving
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door or hood.
● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■ Panic mode
Vehicles with power back door
When PANIC is pushed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound for
about 30 seconds and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to break
into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
Vehicles without power back door
75
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system.
If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered
when the battery is reconnected.
■ When using the key to unlock the doors
Deactivate the alarm.
If the doors are unlocked using the key with the alarm operational, the alarm will be
triggered.
76
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
1
Before driving
77
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 37)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 37)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(P. 55, 56)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 45)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 47)
78
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
1
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position:
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
79
Before driving
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
Driver knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.
80
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
1
Before driving
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG
OFF indicator lights
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Curtain shield airbag sensors
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Driver knee airbag
Airbag sensor assembly
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
81
1-7. Safety information
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, AIR BAG ON indicator light, AIR BAG
OFF indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 392)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well
as the front seats, and parts of the front pillar and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The front windshield may crack.
■ Operating conditions (front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the
designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle
is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat
belt pretensioners may not activate together.
82
1-7. Safety information
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(P. 92)
■ Operating conditions (side airbags)
1
● The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is
● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen-
ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger
seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the
seat is unoccupied. (P. 92)
■ Operating conditions (curtain shield airbags)
The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the
illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
83
Before driving
subjected to a severe impact from the side.
1-7. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
84
1-7. Safety information
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in
a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
1
● Collision from the rear
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a
low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
85
Before driving
● Vehicle rollover
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel, front
passenger airbag cover or lower portion of
the instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
1
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
87
Before driving
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver's airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 97)
88
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
89
Before driving
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be
sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 81.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
90
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
91
1
Before driving
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front passenger airbag may
not deploy in the event of a collision.
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
AIR BAG OFF indicator light
AIR BAG ON indicator light
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
92
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
AIR BAG ON
Off
Flashing*2
Activated
1-7. Safety information
■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG
OFF*5
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Flashing*2
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
1
Deactivated
Activated
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Not
illuminated
Off
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
93
Before driving
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights
SRS warning light
1-7. Safety information
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
AIR BAG OFF
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 97)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 100)
94
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger side may not activate correctly, which
could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-
back pocket or armrest).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
95
Before driving
● Wear the seat belt properly.
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illu-
minated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 100)
● Do not remove the seat.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
96
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
1
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the
child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P.
100)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Infant seat
97
Before driving
Points to remember
1-7. Safety information
Convertible seat
Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a
child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt.
(P. 47)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
98
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
● A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front
passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as
possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
the child may be killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of collision.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
99
1
Before driving
if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint
lower anchorage. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 47)
Child restraint lower anchorages
Lower anchorages are provided for the outside rear seats.
(Buttons displaying the location
of the anchorages are attached
to the seats.)
Anchor bracket
(for top strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
100
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
STEP 1
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
1
Before driving
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
101
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down
into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child
seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward facing Convertible seat
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
102
1-7. Safety information
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat is
securely in place.
■ Booster seat
STEP 1
STEP 2
Place the booster seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 47)
103
1
Before driving
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Installation with child restraint lower anchorages
STEP 1
Fold the seatback forward and
then back to the 1st lock position
(most upright position) until it locks
into place. Adjust the seatback to
the 3rd lock position.
1st lock position
3rd lock position
STEP 2
104
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
1-7. Safety information
Type A
Latch the hooks of lower straps
onto the anchorages.
STEP 3
1
Before driving
Canada only
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
STEP 3
Canada only
If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto
the anchorages. (P. 106)
105
1-7. Safety information
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower
connector system.
Child restraint systems with a top strap
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
106
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or a lower anchors, and
remove the head restraint.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
Replace the head restraint and lift
it up to the uppermost lock position.
1-7. Safety information
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819.
1
Before driving
107
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 50)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Only put a forward facing or booster child
seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing or
booster child seat on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
108
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position, adjust both
● When using the lower anchorages for a child restraint system, ensure that the
seat is moved to the rear-most position, with the seatback close to the child
restraint system.
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or
sudden braking.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages
When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make
sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
109
1
Before driving
seat cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may
cause death or serious injuries in a collision.
1-7. Safety information
110
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures ........ 112
2
Driving the vehicle................... 112
2-4. Using other driving
systems.......................... 150
Engine (ignition) switch......... 120
Cruise control.......................... 150
Automatic Transmission........ 123
Turn signal lever....................... 128
Dynamic laser cruise
control ..................................... 154
Parking brake........................... 129
Driving assist systems............ 164
2-2. Instrument cluster ......... 130
Gauges and meters................ 130
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 132
Trip information display ......... 136
Electronically modulated
air suspension......................... 169
2-5. Driving information........ 174
Off-road precautions ............. 174
Cargo and luggage ................. 179
Vehicle load limits................... 182
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers......... 139
Winter driving tips.................. 183
Headlight switch...................... 139
Dinghy towing.......................... 198
Trailer towing ........................... 188
Fog light switch ........................ 142
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 143
Rear window wiper and
washer ..................................... 148
Headlight cleaner switch...... 149
111
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the engine
P. 120
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 123)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 129)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, push the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N.
(P. 123)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 129)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 123)
STEP 4 Turn the engine switch to stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
112
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
2
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
•
•
•
•
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 424)
■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
113
When driving
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause
driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle
is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result
in a loss of vehicle control.
114
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an
accident.
● Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster system will not operate properly if the
engine is not running.
2
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
● With electronically modulated air suspension vehicles, if you drive through water,
such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the
bottom of the river bed of firmness, put the vehicle height in the “HI” (high) mode
with the height select switch and then turn off the electronically modulated air
suspension by pushing the height control switch. Drive your vehicle at 19 mph
(30 km/h) or lower speed.
115
When driving
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 124)
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an
accident caused by the vehicle moving.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
116
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
117
2
When driving
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
118
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ While driving the vehicle
119
2
When driving
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together
to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 406)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle,
transfer (4WD vehicles), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (4WD vehicles), bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
■ Engine (ignition) switch
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(The key can be removed
only when the shift lever is in
P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components
can be used.
“START”
■ Starting the engine
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
STEP 4 Turn the key to the START position and start the engine.
■ Turning the key from ACC to LOCK
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 2 Push in the key and turn to the
LOCK position.
120
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Steering lock release
When starting the engine, the engine switch
may seem stuck in the LOCK position. To
free it, turn the key while turning the steering
wheel slightly in either direction.
2
■ If the engine does not start
■ Starting the engine using the flat key
STEP 1
Remove the flat key from its case. Insert the
key into the engine switch.
STEP 2
Bring the key case close to the engine switch
within 10 seconds as indicated by an arrow.
STEP 3 Put the key case away when the indicator light goes out. This means the
engine immobilizer system has turned off.
STEP 4 Start the engine within 60 seconds after the indicator light goes off.
121
When driving
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 72)
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the LOCK position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine
switch only to the ACC position.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods without
the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter
and wiring system.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
122
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic Transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
2
When driving
While the engine switch is in the ON position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Standard type
Multi-mode type
123
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Function
Standard type
Multi-mode type
P
Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*1
S mode driving*2
(P. 125)
S
4
Position for engine
braking
3,2
Position for more
powerful engine braking
L
Position for maximum
engine braking
*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary
upshifting.
124
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Selecting the snow mode
Use the snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road
surfaces, such as on snow.
Turn the ECT SNOW switch on.
Press the button once more to
cancel the snow mode.
2
When driving
Changing shift ranges in S mode (multi-mode type only)
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 4.
125
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Shift range
Function
5
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2
Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1
Setting the gear at 1.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
■ Downshifting restrictions
Standard type
Keep the engine rpm from going into red zone. The maximum allowable speed is as
follows:
Shift position
Maximum speed mph (km/h)
4

3
93 (150)
3

2
58 (93)
2

L
25 (40)
Multi-mode type
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
126
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic laser cruise control sys-
tem
The engine brake will not operate when downshifting from D or 5 to 4.
(P. 150, 154)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off after driving in
snow mode.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
2
P. 413
indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S
(multi-mode type only)
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
127
When driving
■ If the
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
U.S.A.
Canada
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully
depress the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the
brake pedal with your right
foot.
2
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
129
When driving
NOTICE
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges and meters illuminate when the engine switch is
in the ON position.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
130
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer/Trip meter/Dynamic laser cruise control display
Dynamic laser cruise control display
P. 154
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was
last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
2
When driving
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In
this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after
it has cooled completely. (P. 418)
131
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
Center panel
132
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.
(Canada)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 150, 154)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 139)
Conventional cruise control indicator
(P. 154)
Headlight indicator
(P. 139)
Tail light indicator
(P. 139)
(vehicles with
dynamic laser
cruise control)
(vehicles with
dynamic laser
cruise control)
2
When driving
(U.S.A.)
Turn signal indicator
(P. 128)
Ready mode indicator
(P. 154)
* VSC OFF indicator
(P. 165)
Slip indicator
(P. 164)
(vehicles with a standard automatic transmission)
Shift position indicator (P. 123)
(vehicles
with
discharge
headlights)
AFS OFF indicator
(P. 140)
133
2-2. Instrument cluster
(vehicles with a multi-mode automatic transmission)
Shift position and shift range indicators (P. 123)
(if equipped)
Electronically modulated air suspension indicator
(P. 169)
* AIR BAG ON indicator
(P. 92)
ECT SNOW indicator
(P. 125)
134
* AIR BAG OFF indicator
(P. 92)
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems.
*
(Canada)
*
(U.S.A.)
*
*
(Canada)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
(U.S.A.)
*
(Canada)
*
*
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
*
2
(vehicles with discharge headlights)
When driving
(4WD
models)
*
*
(if equipped)
*: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position
to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off
after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn
off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS, VSC and the SRS airbag warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not
available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious
injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
135
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information display
The trip information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data.
Trip information display
• Driving time
• Average vehicle speed
• Average fuel consumption
• Current fuel consumption
• Driving distance
• Driving range
Display and operation
Display items can be switched by
pushing the INFO switch.
136
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Driving time
Displays the elapsed time after the engine starts.
When the engine is started, driving time is counted from
0:00. Up to 11:59 (11 hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed.
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine
was started or the function was reset.
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled.
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■ Driving distance
Displays the driving distance since the engine was
started.
The function can be reset by pushing the INFO switch
for longer than one second when the driving distance is
displayed.
137
When driving
The function can be reset by pushing the INFO switch
for longer than one second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
2
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the display while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
138
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
U.S.A. Canada
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
2
When driving
The headlights and parking lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the engine switch
is in the ON position)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
139
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
AFS (vehicles with discharge headlights)
AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights
according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 18 mph (30 km/h) or higher.
■ Deactivating AFS
Turn the switch OFF to deactivate
AFS.
OFF
ON
■ Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake
is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight control system to malfunction.
140
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after all doors are closed with the engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK
position. (The light turns off immediately if the LOCK button on the key is pressed
after all doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically with the
engine switch turned to the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door is
opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the ON position, or turn the
or
position.
light switch to the off position once and then back to the
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ If the
indicator flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights)
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
141
When driving
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)
2
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
To turn the front fog lights off
To turn the front fog lights on
142
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
■ Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped)
When intermittent wiper operation is selected, wiper intervals can
be adjusted.
Off
Intermittent
windshield wiper operation
Low speed windshield
wiper operation
High speed windshield wiper operation
Temporary operation
2
When driving
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
143
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)
With
selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper
timing in accordance with rain volume.
Off
Rain-sensing wiper
operation
Low speed wiper
operation
High speed wiper
operation
Temporary operation
144
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Sensor sensitivity (high)
Sensor sensitivity (low)
2
Washer/wiper dual operation
When driving
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with the rain-sensing wind-
shield wipers)
When low speed wiper operation is selected, wiper operation will be switched from
low speed to intermittent wiper operation when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, the mode will not be switched when the adjustment dial for the automatic wiper control sensitivity is set to high.)
145
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Rain drop sensor (vehicles with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
The setting of the wiper operation when the vehicle is stationary can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 447)
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
146
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
2
When driving
147
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
Off
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
148
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch (if equipped)
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
2
When the engine switch must be in the ON position and the headlight switch is
turned ON.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty.
This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.
149
When driving
■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control (if equipped)
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■ Set the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Turn the ON-OFF button ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
150
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set the cruise
control speed.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
2
When driving
■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
151
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Fine adjustment of the set speed
Adjustment of the set speed by approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) can be made by
lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or 4 (standard type) or D, 4 or 5 range of S (multi-mode
type).
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph (200
km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
■ Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the ON-OFF button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
152
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
● In heavy traffic
When driving
● On roads with sharp bends
2
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
● On winding roads
153
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic laser cruise control (if equipped)
Dynamic laser cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Indicator
Display
Cruise control switch
Distance switch
■ Select cruise mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Turn the ON-OFF button
ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
154
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Turn the ON-OFF button
ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when
the engine switch is turned to
the ON position.
2
When driving
Switch to constant speed
control mode.
(push and hold for approximately one second)
■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set.
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is displayed.
155
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Each push of the switch toward
you changes the vehicle-toPreceding
vehicle distance
vehicle mark
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is automatically set to the long
mode when the engine switch is
turned to the ON position.
A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle
if a vehicle is running ahead of
you.
156
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a laser radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your
vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.
2
When driving
Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles
ahead):
When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving
slower than the set speed):
When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle
ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your
vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
157
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower
than the set speed):
When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is
driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving
slower than the set speed in the lane ahead):
When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead
driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
■ Fine adjustment of the set speed
Adjustment of the set speed by the following speed can be made by lightly pressing
the lever up or down and releasing it.
In the constant speed control mode: Approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h)
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
U.S.A.: Approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
Canada: Approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
■ Dynamic laser cruise control warning lights, display and buzzers
Warning lights, display and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to
alert you to the need for caution while driving.
Warning code
CRUISE indicator light
Master warning light
158
2-4. Using other driving systems
The warning codes indicate the following.
Warning code
Details
Correction procedures
E1
Indicates that the laser
radar sensor is dirty or
covered with ice.
E2
• Stop the wiper or
switch the wiper to
variable intermittent
Indicates that the system
operation.
is unable to judge the
• Turn off the SNOW
vehicle-to-vehicle dismode.
tance.
• Avoid direct sunlight.
• Wait until the weather
becomes clear.
(Flashing)
Indicates that a system
malfunction has been
detected.
Turn off and restart the
engine switch.
If the same code appears again after implementing the correction procedure, or if
the cruise control cannot be set, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ The dynamic laser cruise can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or 4 (standard type) or D or, 4 or 5 range of S (multi-mode
type).
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 27 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph (135
km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
159
2
When driving
E3
Clean the sensor.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.*
● The windshield wipers are operating at high or low speed.*
● The ECT SNOW switch is set to snow mode.*
*: Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the ON-OFF
button on again.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated
160
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 55 mph (88 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 245 ft. (75 m)
Medium
Approximately 165 ft. (50 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
2
Always keep the sensor clean to ensure that
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as
snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be
detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic laser cruise control is canceled if an
obstruction is detected.
■ Certification
This product is a class I laser product complied with 21 C. F. R part 1040. 10. and
1040. 11.
161
When driving
■ Laser radar sensor
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic laser cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic laser cruise control
Do not use dynamic laser cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow.
● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
● Where buzzer can be heard often
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When the laser radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (P. 158) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
2
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the laser radar sensor
may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
■ To ensure the laser radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Stick or attach anything to them
● Leave them dirty
● Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks
● Modify or paint them
● Replace them with non-genuine parts
163
When driving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■ Brake Assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels (2WD models) or all
wheels (4WD models) from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
When the VSC/TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, or if the front wheels (2WD
models) or all wheels (4WD models) spin, the slip indicator light
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the
system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■ Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the button for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off TRAC and
VSC.
The slip indicator light and VSC
OFF indicator light should come
on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
165
When driving
The slip indicator light should come
on.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will
automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle
speed increases.
■ Automatic TRAC/VSC reactivation
If the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started
or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
•
•
•
•
166
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
When driving
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
2
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC
and VSC unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
Electronically modulated air suspension (if equipped)
The electronically modulated air suspension allows the driver to control
the vehicle's height in order to adjust for driving conditions.
Select the desired height with the height selector switch.
Easy access mode switch
Height control switch
Height selector switch
2
When driving
Selecting vehicle height
Higher
Lower
Vehicle height can be adjusted
only when the engine is running.
The indicator light stops blinking,
and comes on continuously to indicate that the mode shift is completed.
169
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Height modes
● N mode (normal mode): For ordinary driving
Normal height
● HI mode (high mode): For driving on bumpy roads
1.2 in. (30 mm) higher than the normal height
The HI mode is unavailable when the vehicle's speed exceeds 19
mph (30 km/h).
● LO mode (low mode): For sporty driving (on winding road or high
speed driving, etc.)
0.6 in. (15 mm) lower than the normal height
Easy access mode
You can select this mode for easy
access and easy loading of the
vehicle.
If the engine is stopped when this
mode is on, the vehicle height is
lowered automatically. The indicator light stops blinking, and comes
on continuously to indicate that the
shift is completed. The easy access
mode is available when N or LO
mode is selected.
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling the height control
When the height control switch is
pressed, the vehicle height returns
to the mode last selected.
When the vehicle's speed exceeds
19 mph (30 km/h), the electronically modulated air suspension
turns ON automatically.
Regardless of the number of occupants or the luggage load, vehicle height in any
mode is always adjusted to a fixed height by the automatic leveling function.
■ When N mode is selected
The vehicle height will lower about 0.3 in. (7 mm) when vehicle speed exceeds 62
mph (100 km/h).
The vehicle height will return to the normal height when vehicle speed is reduced to
under 50 mph (80 km/h).
■ When HI mode is selected
The vehicle height will change to N mode when vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50
km/h) or driving at the speeds of 19 mph (30 km/h).
Even if vehicle speed is then reduced to under 31 mph (50 km/h), the height will not
return to HI mode.
■ When LO mode is selected
The vehicle height will change to N mode when the engine is turned off.
■ When easy access mode is selected
● The vehicle height will change to N mode when vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12
km/h).
● The vehicle height will change to N mode when the engine is restarted.
171
When driving
■ Automatic leveling function
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ The electronically modulated air suspension will not operate in the following
cases:
● The underbody of the vehicle is touching the surface of the road.
● The area around the suspension is covered with ice.
The indicator lights will blink, turn off and then turn on continuously to indicate that
the electronically modulated air suspension is not operational.
To re-enable operation, turn off the engine and then restart it.
■ Even if you hear an operating noise
This does not indicate a problem in the electronically modulated air suspension.
■ If there is a problem somewhere in the electronically modulated air suspension
The height control OFF indicator light will behave as follows:
● The light will not come on when the engine switch is turned on.
● The light will blink.
Although the vehicle may be driven, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
CAUTION
■ The electronically modulated air suspension must be turned OFF in the following
circumstances:
Otherwise, the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle's height to
change, resulting in an unexpected accident.
● When driving through water such as shallow streams (Put the vehicle height in HI
mode and turn off the electronically modulated air suspension. Drive at 19 mph
[30 km/h] or slower.)
● When jacking up the vehicle, installing tire chains or tying the vehicle with chains/
wires for transportation via flat bed truck (Turn off the electronically modulated
air suspension and stop the engine.)
● When the vehicle must be towed (Put the vehicle height in N mode and turn off
the electronically modulated air suspension.)
● When the vehicle gets stuck (Turn off the electronically modulated air suspen-
sion.)
● When disconnecting a trailer (Put the vehicle height in LO mode and turn off the
electronically modulated air suspension.)
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Selecting the correct height mode
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the vehicle, as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
● Before you lower the vehicle's height or select the easy access mode, check
under the vehicle to make sure that no one is there.
2
● The HI mode should be used for off-road driving conditions.
● Do not select HI mode when you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier.
This may result in a loss of control or vehicle rollover.
NOTICE
■ Be careful in any place where overhead space is limited.
When changing to a higher mode or after unloading, the vehicle height will rise.
This may cause damage to the vehicle.
■ Do not select LO mode when driving on bumpy roads.
If the underbody of the vehicle touches a rugged road surface, the vehicle may be
damaged.
■ Do not change the vehicle height frequently.
The compressor might overheat and cause the operation to stop.
173
When driving
As the vehicle's center of gravity is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become
unstable when turning abruptly.
2-5. Driving information
Off-road precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of
off-road applications.
Off-road vehicle feature
● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause rollover.
174
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
2
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle
gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or
abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of
gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down
is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways
much more easily than forward or backward.
175
When driving
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
2-5. Driving information
Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of
areas to off-road vehicles.
● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted
to travel.
● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.
● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
■ Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult
the following organizations.
● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
176
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in
dangerous places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could
jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
mud, water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no
grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody.
Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds,
jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or
other components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality,
locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature
failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
177
When driving
● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand,
2
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and
avoid deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may
affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that
has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
178
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
2
When driving
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
179
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 925 lb. (420 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
925 lb. — 366 lb. = 559 lb. (420 kg —166 kg = 254 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
559 lb. — 388 lb. = 171 lb. (254 kg — 176 kg = 78 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
180
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
● Do not place anything on the luggage cover, and do not stack anything in the lug-
2
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may
When driving
gage compartment higher than the seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.
get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being
depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers,
causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Luggage cover
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event
of sudden braking or a collision.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
181
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 925 lb. (420 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■ Towing capacity
Without towing package: 2000 lb. (907 kg)
With towing package: 3500 lb. (1588 kg)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 340)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
182
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
•
•
•
•
Engine oil
Engine coolant
Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity
of battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the front tires.
2
When driving
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
● Tire pressure falls in winter as the outside temperature falls. Add
2.9 to 4.3 psi (20 to 30 kPa, 0.2 to 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
standard tire inflation pressure.
183
2-5. Driving information
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released.
184
2-5. Driving information
Selecting snow chains
Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire sizes.
Side chain
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
Cross chain
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
2
When driving
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
● Install the chains on the front tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
185
2-5. Driving information
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear tires.
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instruc-
tions.
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
186
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire air pressure sensor.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire air pressure sensor may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
2
When driving
187
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance,
braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of
others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing
a trailer for commercial purposes.
■ Weight limits
Confirm that the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
■ Gross vehicle weight
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross
vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also included is the
weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.
■ Gross axle weight
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
Certification Label
188
2-5. Driving information
■ Trailer tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the following.
Without towing package: 200 lb. (90 kg)
With towing package: 350 lb. (158 kg)
(Tongue load / Total trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing stations, building supply
companies, trucking companies, junk yards, etc.
2
When driving
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
Towing a trailer
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kits, etc.
Hitch and tow hitch receiver
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum
weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.
189
2-5. Driving information
■ Tow hitch receiver
A tow hitch receiver installed
under the rear bumper is rated for
weight that does not exceed the
vehicle's total towing weight.
Selecting trailer ball
Use the correct trailer ball for your application.
Trailer ball load rating
Matches or exceeds the gross
trailer weight rating of the trailer.
Ball diameter
Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped
with the required trailer ball size.
Shank length
Protrudes beyond the bottom of
the lock washer and nut at least 2
threads.
Shank diameter
Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.
190
2-5. Driving information
Connecting trailer lights
With tow hitch receiver
Use the socket located under the rear bumper.
Without tow hitch receiver
Use the wire harness stored in the rear end under body.
■ When connecting and disconnecting a trailer (vehicles with electrically modu-
2
lated air suspension)
STEP 1 Set the electronically modulated air suspension to LO mode.
STEP 2 Turn off the engine switch or the electronically modulated air suspension.
STEP 3 Connect the trailer.
STEP 4 Turn on the switch that was turned off on step 2.
STEP 5 Set the electronically modulated air suspension to N mode.
Disconnecting
STEP 1 Set the electronically modulated air suspension to LO mode.
STEP 2 Turn off the electronically modulated air suspension.
STEP 3 Turn off the engine switch.
STEP 4 Set the supporting leg of the trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 4
in. (100 mm)
STEP 5 Turn on the engine switch.
STEP 6 Turn on the electronically modulated air suspension.
STEP 7 Wait until vehicle height is stabilized.
Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If the hitch does not disconnect, raise the hitch
higher and repeat steps 2 through 7.
191
When driving
Connecting
2-5. Driving information
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
● The vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (P. 340)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation.
● All trailer lights work
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set up at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not
drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue load, overloading,
worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local
regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
■ Break-in schedule
Lexus recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new
power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) to
tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to
the additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide/ Owner's Manual Supplement/ Scheduled Maintenance”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600
miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
192
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ To avoid accident or injury
● The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus the weight of cargo) must not exceed
the following.
Without towing package: 2000 lb. (907 kg)
With towing package: 3500 lb. (1588 kg)
● If a trailer and cargo weigh over 2000 lb. (907 kg), use a sway control device
with sufficient capacity.
2
● The gross combined weight (sum of your vehicle weight plus its load and the total
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue load capacities.
● Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About 60% of
the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining 40% in the
rear.
● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension, set the vehicle height to
the LO mode and turn off the electronically modulated air suspension to prevent
the vehicle height from automatically changing.
● The tow hitch receiver installed on your vehicle must never be used on another
vehicle.
■ Hitches
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing
the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
193
When driving
trailer weight) must not exceed the following.
Without towing package: 7265 lb. (3295 kg)
With towing package: 8765 lb. (3976 kg)
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ When towing a trailer
● If the total trailer weight exceeds 1000 lb. (450 kg), trailer brakes are required.
● Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's
braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the
trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is
danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
● Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the
trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing,
wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
■ Brakes
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
■ Safety chain
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer.
Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer
tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it
becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation procedure, ask your Lexus dealer.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and
cause a malfunction.
194
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main
causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and
improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to
move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the
trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer
attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide
you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss
of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making
turns.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a
larger than normal turning radius.
195
2
When driving
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an
area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle.
2-5. Driving information
● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your
vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare
for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel,
reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead.
Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the
steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your
trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
● In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging
performance, do not use overdrive. Transmission shift range position
must be in 4, in the S mode.
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up
a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use),
pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. (P. 418)
● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
196
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into P and turn off the engine.
2-5. Driving information
● When restarting after parking on a slope:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
With the transmission in the P position, start the engine. Be sure
to keep the brake pedal pressed.
Shift into 3, 2, 1, or the R position (if reversing).
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
2
CAUTION
● Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is
lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increases
as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause loss of control.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do
not make sudden downshifts.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too fre-
quently.
This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
197
When driving
■ To avoid an accident
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
198
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger... 200
Automatic air
conditioning system........... 200
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers,
and windshield wiper
de-icer .................................... 206
3-2. Using the front audio
system........................... 207
Audio system type.................. 207
Using the radio....................... 209
Using the CD player .............. 216
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs............................ 222
Optimal use of the audio
system .................................... 230
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ..................... 233
3-3. Using the rear audio
system........................... 235
Rear seat entertainment
system features.................... 235
Using the DVD player
(DVD video)........................... 241
Using the DVD player
(video CD)............................. 248
Using the DVD player
(audio CD/ CD text) ......... 250
Using the DVD player
(MP3 discs)............................ 251
Using the video mode........... 253
3
Changing the initial
setting..................................... 255
3-4. Using the interior
lights ............................. 262
Interior lights list .................... 262
• Interior lights........................ 265
• Personal lights ..................... 266
3-5. Using the storage
features ........................ 267
List of storage features.......... 267
• Glove box.............................. 267
• Console boxes..................... 268
• Overhead console.............. 270
• Cup holders........................... 271
• Door pockets ....................... 272
3-6. Other interior
features ........................ 274
Sun visors .................................. 274
Vanity mirror ............................ 275
Clock.......................................... 276
Outside temperature
display...................................... 277
Multi-display light control... 278
Power outlet ............................. 279
Seat heaters ............................ 282
Armrest .................................... 284
Floor mat .................................. 285
Luggage compartment
features.................................. 286
Garage door opener ............ 289
Compass .................................. 294
199
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Fan speed display
Airflow display
Driver’s side
temperature
setting display
Passenger’s side temperature
setting display
Windshield
defogger
Automatic
mode
Passenger’s side
temperature
control
Off
Dual operation switch
Fan speed Changes the air outlets used
Driver's side
temperature control
Air conditioning ON/OFF switch
Outside air or recirculated air mode
200
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. According
to the temperature setting, air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted, and the mode automatically switches
between outside air and recirculated air modes.
STEP 2
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the temperature on
.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press  to increase the temperature and  to decrease the temperature on
.
Press  (increase) or  (decrease) on
to separately adjust the temper-
ature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press
to return
the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time
is pressed.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Press  (increase) or  (decrease) on
Press
.
to turn the fan off.
201
Interior features
Adjusting the settings
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets switch each time the
button is pressed.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air mode.
202
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator OFF) and recirculated air mode (indicator ON) modes each time the button is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
203
3
Interior features
Recirculated air mode will automatically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front outlets (right and left side)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob up to open the
vent and down to close the vent
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob up to open the
vent and down to close the vent
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
● The system may switch automatically to recirculated air mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.
● Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situations
where the windows need to be defogged.
204
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C).
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
■ When the indicator light on
is pressed.
flashes
Press
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light
continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when
the engine is stopped.
205
Interior features
NOTICE
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers, and windshield wiper de-icer
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops,
dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors. De-icer* is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
ON/OFF
The defoggers and de-icer will
automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes.
*: Vehicles for Canada only
■ The defogger and de-icer can be operated when
The engine switch must be in the ON position.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot
and burn you.
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
206
3-2. Using the front audio system
Audio system type
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
3
Interior features
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 209
Using the CD player
P. 216
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
P. 222
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 230
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 233
207
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of
its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
208
3-2. Using the front audio system
Using the radio
Scan for
receivable stations
Station
selector
Seeking any traffic
program station
Changing the
program
types
Seeking the
frequency
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
Power Volume
Interior features
AMSAT/FM
mode buttons
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1
on
STEP 2
or pressing  or 
Search for desired stations by turning
.
Press and hold the button (from
be set to, and you hear a beep.
to
) the station is to
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
3
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
209
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
Press  or  on
during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
● ROCK
● EASYLIS (Easy listening)
● CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
● R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
● INFORM (Information)
● RELIGION
● MISC (Miscellaneous)
● ALERT (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, NO PTY appears on the display.
STEP 2
Press
, or  or  on
.
The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.
■ Displaying radio station names
Press
.
210
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
If MSG is shown on the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display,
hold
until you hear a beep.
is displayed. Press and
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1
Turn
3
to select the desired channel in the all categories or
press  or  on
to select the desired channel in the current category.
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from
to
) the channel is to be set to, and you hear a beep.
■ Changing the channel category
Press  or  on
.
■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning channels in the current category
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
211
Interior features
STEP 2
Press
until SAT is shown on the display.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
AM  SAT1  SAT2  SAT3
3-2. Using the front audio system
● Scanning preset channels
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press the button
again.
■ Displaying text information
Press
.
STEP 1
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
● CH NAME
● TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
● NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
● CH NUMBER
212
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ When the battery is disconnected
Station presets are erased.
■ Radio antenna type
● Detachable antenna
To remove a detachable antenna, carefully turn it counterclockwise.
● Wire antenna
The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other
3
metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem.
Select “CH000” using
, and the receiver's 8-character ID number will
appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
213
Interior features
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
214
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
3-2. Using the front audio system
---
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada)
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
215
Interior features
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
3
3-2. Using the front audio system
Using the CD player
Random playback
CD eject
Repeat play
Search playback
CD insert
Selecting a track
Selecting a CD
Playback
Power Volume
Displays text message
Loading CDs
■ Loading a CD
STEP 1 Press
.
WAIT is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.
■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
WAIT is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
216
3-2. Using the front audio system
STEP 3
Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from
amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press
.
Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
STEP 1 To select the CD to be ejected, press  or  on
.
The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.
Press
and remove the CD.
■ Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
STEP 2
■ Selecting a track
Press  to move up and  to move down using
desired track number is displayed.
To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold  or  on
until the
.
■ Scanning a CD
STEP 1 Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
Press the switch again when the desired track is reached.
217
Interior features
Selecting, fast-forwarding, rewind, and scanning tracks
3
3-2. Using the front audio system
Selecting a CD
■ To select a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press  or  on
■ To scan loaded CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
.
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
STEP 2
Press the button again when the desired CD is reached.
Repeat play
■ To repeat a track
Press
(RPT).
■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ Current CD
Press
(RAND).
Tracks are played in random order until random playback is canceled.
■ All CDs
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the button is
pressed once more.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./
Elapsed time  CD title  Track name.
218
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT), or
again.
■ When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display
LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
ERROR: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may
be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
WAIT:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for
a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still
cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
3
Interior features
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
219
3-2. Using the front audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
● Low-quality and deformed CDs.
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off.
220
3-2. Using the front audio system
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
3
Interior features
221
3-2. Using the front audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Random playback
CD eject
Search playback
Repeat play
Selecting a folder
CD insert
Selecting a file
Selecting a CD
Selecting a file
Power Volume
Playback
Displays text message
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 216
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
() or
() to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Press and hold
until you hear a beep. The first ten seconds of the
first file in each folder will be played. When the desired folder is
reached, press the button once again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
() until you hear a beep.
222
3-2. Using the front audio system
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
or press  or  on
Turn
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press
. The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
When the desired file is reached, press the button once again.
Repeat play
■ To repeat a file
Press
(RPT).
3
Interior features
■ To repeat all of the files on a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ To play files from a particular folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
■ To play all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder
no./File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3
only)  Track title  Artist name.
223
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT), or
again.
■ When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display.
LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
ERROR: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD may
be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
WAIT:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for
a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still
cannot be played back.
NO MUSIC: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
224
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
* Compatible with VBR
3
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
*Only compatible with 2-channel playback
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc
is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
225
Interior features
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
3-2. Using the front audio system
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 level 1, level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
226
3-2. Using the front audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
227
3
Interior features
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
3-2. Using the front audio system
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and render the CD insert/eject function
unusable.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
● Low-quality and deformed CDs.
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off.
228
3-2. Using the front audio system
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the CDs or the
player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
3
Interior features
229
3-2. Using the front audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode.
Changes the following settings.
• Sound quality and volume
balance (P. 231)
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to produce the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
ON/OFF (P. 231)
• Listening position (P. 232)
The sound feel setting can be
changed to produce the best
sound for each listening position.
• Rear system lock ON/OFF
of rear seat entertainment
system
(P. 232)
Using the AUDIO CONTROL function
■ Changing modes
Pressing
selects the mode to be change in the following order.
BASMIDTREFADBALASLRSEPOS
230
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning
adjusts the level.
Mode
displayed
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
Bass*
BAS
-5 to 5
Mid-range*
MID
-5 to 5
Low
High
Treble*
TRE
-5 to 5
Front/rear
volume
balance
FAD
F7 to R7
Shifts to rear
Shifts to front
Left/right
volume
balance
BAL
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each AMSATFM or CD
mode.
■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Turning
to the right turns ON the ASL, and turning
to the
left turns OFF the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
231
3
Interior features
Sound quality mode
3-2. Using the front audio system
■ Changing the listening position
Turning
changes the position in the following order.
Display
Listening position
DRIVER
Position best suited to the driver’s seat
FRONT
Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger
seats
REAR
ALL
Position best suited to the rear seats
Position best suited to all seats
■ Rear system lock ON/OFF
Turn
until ON/OFF is displayed,
and press.
The rear system lock remains on,
even when the engine switch is
turned off.
232
3-2. Using the front audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Power on, select audio
source
Volume
Radio: Select radio stations
CD: Select tracks, files (MP3
and WMA) and discs
3
Turning on the power
when the audio system is turned OFF.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for a few seconds.
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
FM1FM2CD changerAMSAT1SAT2SAT3
Adjusting the volume
Press + on
to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume.
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
233
Interior features
Press
3-2. Using the front audio system
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2
Press or  on the
switch to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear
a beep.
Selecting a track/file
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press  or  on
to select the desired track/file.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press and hold  or  on
until a beep is heard.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
234
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Rear seat entertainment system features (if equipped)
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to
enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the front audio system.
3
Interior features
Front audio system
Display
Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks
DVD player
A/V input adapter
Power outlet
Rear seat entertainment system controller
Power outlet main switch
235
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Opening and closing the display
Press the lock release button to
open the display.
Pull the display down to an easily
viewable angle (between 90 and
125).
To close the display, press the display up until a click is heard to
close the display.
The illumination of the screen is
automatically turned off when the
display is closed. However, the rear
seat entertainment system is not
turned off.
Loading a disc
Insert the disc into the slot with the
label side up.
The DISC indicator light turns on
while the disc is loaded.
The player will play the track or
chapter, and will repeat it after it
reaches the end.
236
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Ejecting a disc
Press
and remove the disc.
Headphone jacks
3
Left side dial: Turn it toward the
rear of the vehicle to increase
the volume. Turn it toward the
front of the vehicle to decrease
the volume.
237
Interior features
To use the headphones, connect
them to the jack.
To adjust the volume
Right side dial: Turn it toward the
front of the vehicle to increase
the volume. Turn it toward the
rear of the vehicle to decrease
the volume.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ The rear seat entertainment system can be used when
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■ When
appears on the screen
It indicates that the selected switch cannot work.
■ Rear system lock
P. 232
238
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ Error messages
DISC CHECK:
Indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged or was inserted upside
down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
REGION ERROR: Indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.
DVD ERROR:
Indicates that there is a problem inside the player. Eject the disc.
Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take the vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
■ Before using the remote control (for new vehicle owners)
An insulating sheet is set to prevent the batteries from being discharged. Remove the
insulating sheet before using the remote control.
With some headphones generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch
signals properly. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless headphones.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
■ Volume
● Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones to the jack. Loud sounds
may have a significant impact on the human body.
● Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be
startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.
Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind.
239
Interior features
■ Headphones
3
3-3. Using the rear audio system
CAUTION
■ While driving
Do not use headphones.
Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the rear seat entertainment system is not used
Keep the display closed.
In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant's body, resulting in injury.
■ To prevent accidents and electric shock
Do not disassemble or modify the remote control.
■ When the remote control is not used
Stow the remote control.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
240
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Using the DVD player (DVD video)
■ Remote control
Turning on the DVD mode
Selecting a chapter
Reversing a screen
Turning on the menu screen
Turning on the title selection
screen
Searching the title
Changing the screen angle
Inputting the selected switch
Selecting a switch
Playing/pausing a screen
Fast forwarding a screen
Stopping a screen
Changing the subtitle language
Changing the audio language
3
Interior features
■ Unit
Turning on the DVD mode
Skipping to the desired chapter
Playing/pausing a screen
Selecting a switch/inputting
the selected switch
241
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ Display (Page 1)
Turning off the operation
switches on the display
Displaying Page 2
Turning on or off the title
selection screen for the disc
Turning on or off the menu
screen for the disc
Reversing a screen
Stopping a screen
Pausing the disc/canceling
the pause
Fast forwarding a screen
■ Display (Page 2)
Displaying to the initial setting
screen
Displaying to Page 1
Search for a title
Returning to the previous
screen
Changing the audio language
Changing the subtitle language
Changing the angle
242
3-3. Using the rear audio system
NOTICE
■ Cleaning the display
Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth.
If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be
scratched.
■ To prevent damage to the remote control
● Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, temperature heat and high
humidity.
● Do not drop or knock the remote control against hard objects.
● Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote control.
■ DVD player
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
Interior features
Turning on or off the operation switches
Press
or
Press
or
tion switches.
to turn on the operation switches.
once again or select
3
to turn off the opera-
Turning on the title selection screen
Press
or select
to turn on the title selection screen. For the
operation of the title selection screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.
Turning on the menu screen
Press
or select
to turn on the menu screen. For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
243
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Returning to the previous screen
Press
to return to the previous screen. For the operation of the
menu screen, see the separate manual for the DVD disc.
Searching for a title
Press
or select
to
display the screen to search for a
title.
Select the title number, and press
ENT to input it.
Select
to return to the previous screen.
Changing the subtitle language
Press
or select
to
display the subtitle language
screen.
Each time
is pressed or
is selected, another language stored on the disc is
selected.
Select
to return to the previous screen.
244
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Changing the audio language
Press
or select
to
display the audio language screen.
Each time
is pressed or
is selected, another language stored on the disc is
selected.
Select
to return to the previous screen.
Changing the angle
3
Each time
is pressed or
is selected, the angle
changes.
Select
to return to the previous screen.
■ DVD player and DVD video discs
This DVD player is compatible NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used.
■ Region codes
Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating where you can use them. If
the DVD video disc is not labeled ALL or 1, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If
you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, REGION
CODE ERROR appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a
region code, in some cases you cannot use it.
245
Interior features
Press
or select
to
display the screen to change the
angle.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ Marks shown on DVD video discs
Indicates NTSC format of color TV.
Indicates the number of audio tracks.
Indicates the number of language subtitles.
Indicates the number of angles.
Indicates the screen to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in which this video disc can be
played.
All: all countries
Number: region code
■ DVD video disc glossary
● DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discs that holds world’s standard video. DVD
video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and
stored. Variable rate encoded technology has been adopted in which the volume
of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format.
Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher sound.
Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the
more advanced technology of DVD video.
● Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the
level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on
the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent
scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.
• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
• Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
246
3-3. Using the rear audio system
● Multi-angle feature: Allows you to enjoy the same scene at different angles.
● Multi-language feature: Allows you to select the language of the subtitles and
audio.
● Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player.
● Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio
format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be played.
● Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are
divided into sections by title and chapter.
● Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one piece of a movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a
title.
3
● Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises multiple chapters.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”,
and
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
247
Interior features
■ Audio
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Using the DVD player (video CD)
■ Remote control
Selecting a switch
Selecting a chapter
Playing/pausing a screen
Reversing a screen
Displaying
operation
switches
Inputting the selected switch
Fast forwarding a screen
Stopping a screen
Changing the initial setting
■ Unit
Skipping to the desired chapter
Playing/pausing a screen
Selecting a switch
Inputting the selected switch
248
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ Display (page 1)
■ Display (page 2)
Displaying page 1
Reversing a screen
Pausing the disc/canceling
the pause
Fast forwarding a screen
Selecting a disc menu number
Select
to display the disc menu number search screen.
Select the disc menu number, and press ENT to input it.
Select
to return to the previous screen.
249
3
Interior features
Selecting a disc menu number
Turning off the menu screen
Displaying page 2
Turning on the disc menu
Returning to the previous
page screen (with the disc
menu displayed)
Proceeding to the next page
screen (with the disc menu
displayed)
Changing to a multiplex
transmission
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Using the DVD player (audio CD/ CD text)
Using the control screen, press
or
to display the
control screen.
Repeat play
Random playback
Search playback
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan play
Select
250
,
or
again.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Using the DVD player (MP3 discs)
■ Using the control screen
Press
or
the control screen.
to display
Repeat play
Random playback
Search playback
Displaying file information
Selecting folder
Repeat play
3
Interior features
■ Repeat a file
Select
.
■ Repeat all of files in a folder
Select
, and press and hold ENT on the remote control.
Random playback
■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Select
.
■ Playing all of the files on a disc in random order
Select
, and press and hold ENT on the remote control.
Search playback
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Select
.
The player will scan all the files in the folder. Each file will be played for
10 seconds.
251
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the folders on the disc
Select
, and press and hold ENT the remote control.
The player will scan all the folders on the disc. The first file in each
folder will be played for 10 seconds.
■ Canceling random, repeat and play back
Select
252
,
or
again.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Using the video mode
Press
or
the video mode.
to select
Before switching to the video
mode, connect the audio
machine to the input terminal
adapter.
Using the adapter
3
Open the cover.
Yellow: Image input adapter
White: Audio input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter
■ A/V input adapter
The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio-video
equipment is connected to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
■ Power outlet
The power outlet is used to connect the audio device. (P. 279)
253
Interior features
The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 input adapters.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
NOTICE
■ When the A/V input adapter is not in use
Keep the A/V input adapter cover closed.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or
short circuit.
254
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Changing the initial setting
Press
or select
to
display the initial setting screen.
The following initialization can
be changed here.
Audio language
Subtitle language
DVD language
Angle mark
Parental lock
3
Changing the audio language
Select “Others” if you cannot find
the language you want to hear.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. Select a number, and
press ENT to input it.
Language code list (P. 259)
If a code that is not in the list is
entered, Incorrect Code will
appear on the screen.
255
Interior features
Select “Audio Language”.
Select the language you want to
hear, and press ENT to input it.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Changing the subtitle language
Select “Subtitle Language”.
Select the language you want to
read, and press ENT to input it.
Select “Others” if you cannot find
the language you want to read.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. Select a number, and
press ENT to input it.
Language code list (P. 259)
If a code that is not in the list is
entered, Incorrect Code will
appear on the screen.
256
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Changing the DVD language
Select “DVD Language”.
Select the language you want to
read and press ENT to input it.
Language code list (P. 259)
If a code that is not in the list is
entered, Incorrect Code will
appear on the screen.
Turning on or off the angle mark
The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are multi-angle compatible.
Each time you press ENT when “Angle Mark” is selected, the angle mark
turns on or off alternately.
257
3
Interior features
Select “Others” if you cannot find
the language you want to read.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit language code. Select a number, and
press ENT to input it.
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Setting viewer restriction levels
Setting a password allows the
viewer restriction to be effective.
Select “Parental Lock”.
Enter the password and press ENT.
The setting cannot be changed
unless the password is entered.
When you forget the password, initialize the password. (P. 259)
Select a restriction level (1-8), and
press ENT. The smaller the level
number, the stricter the age limit.
Setting the display mode
Pressing
changes the display modes sequentially as follows:
NormalWide 1 Wide 2
258
3-3. Using the rear audio system
■ Returning to the previous screen
Select
, and press ENT.
■ To initialize the password
Press on the remote control or unit ten times when the screen to enter the personal code is displayed.
■ Language code list
Language
Japanese
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Chinese
Dutch
Portuguese
Swedish
Russian
Korean
Greek
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Amharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Code
0207
0208
0209
0214
0215
0218
0301
0315
0319
0325
0401
0426
0515
0520
0521
0601
0609
0610
0615
0625
0701
0704
0712
Language
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Frisian
Irish
Scots-Gaelic
Galician
3
Interior features
Code
1001
0514
0618
0405
0920
0519
2608
1412
1620
1922
1821
1115
0512
0101
0102
0106
0113
0118
0119
0125
0126
0201
0205
259
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Code
0714
0721
0801
0809
0818
1821
1825
0901
0905
0911
0914
0919
0923
1009
1023
1101
1111
1112
1113
1114
1119
1121
1125
1201
1214
1215
1220
1222
1307
1309
260
Language
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian
Malagasy
Maori
Code
1311
1312
1314
1315
1318
1319
1320
1325
1401
1405
1415
1503
1513
1518
1601
1612
1619
1721
1813
1814
1815
1823
1901
1904
1907
1908
1909
1911
1912
1913
Language
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Punjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Romanian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Sinhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
3-3. Using the rear audio system
Language
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Code
2014
2015
2018
2019
2020
2023
2111
2118
2126
2209
2215
2315
2408
2515
2621
Language
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapük
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
3
Interior features
Code
1914
1915
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1923
2001
2005
2007
2008
2009
2011
2012
■ Adjusting the screen
Press
.
Select the brightness, contrast, tone or color,
and make adjustments. Press
or ENT
to input it.
- or Red
+ or Green
Brightness
Darkens
Brightens
Contrast
Weakens the contrast
Strengthens the contrast
Tone
Weakens the tone
Strengthens the tone
Color
Strengthens the red
color
Strengthens the green
color
261
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Meter ring light
Engine switch light
Front overhead courtesy lights
Front interior light (P. 265)
Front personal lights (P. 266)
Rear interior light
Front door courtesy lighting
Inside door handle lights (if equipped)
Scuff lighting (if equipped)
Foot well lighting (if equipped)
Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the
foot well lighting and inside door handle lights.
262
3-4. Using the interior lights
■ Illuminated entry system
The following lights turn on when any of the doors are unlocked or opened. (The
lights remain on for approximately 15 seconds when the doors are unlocked, but
the lights turn off immediately if the doors are locked.)
● Foot well lighting
● Engine switch light
● Front interior light (interior light switch is in the DOOR position)
● Rear interior light (interior light switch is in the DOOR position)
● Inside door handle lights
● Scuff lighting
The following lights turn on for approximately 15 seconds when the engine switch is
turned to the LOCK position from the ON or ACC position. (The lights turn off
immediately if the engine switch is turned to the ACC or ON position.)
3
● Engine switch light
Interior features
● Front interior light (interior light switch is in the DOOR position)
● Rear interior light (interior light switch is in the DOOR position)
● Scuff lighting
The following lights turn on when the engine switch is in the ON position. (The lights
dim when the shift lever is moved out of the P position. The lights remain on for
approximately 15 seconds after turning the engine switch to the LOCK position
from the ON or ACC position.)
● Inside door handle lights
● Foot well lighting
The front overhead courtesy light turns on when the engine switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
263
3-4. Using the interior lights
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the following lights remain ON when the door is not fully closed and the interior
light switch is in the DOOR position, the lights will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
● Engine switch light
● Front interior light
● Rear interior light
● Inside door handle lights
● Scuff lighting
● Foot well lighting
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 447)
264
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights
Interior lights
Front (models with an electric moon roof)
Door position ON
ON
OFF
Front (models without an electric moon roof)
Door position ON
ON
OFF
3
Interior features
Rear
Door position ON
ON
OFF
265
3-4. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
Personal lights
Models with an electric moon roof
ON/OFF
Models without an electric moon roof
ON/OFF
266
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Glove box
3
Interior features
Overhead console
Glove box
Door pockets
Console boxes
Cup holders
Glove box
Unlock with the key
Lock with the key
Open (pull lever)
267
3-5. Using the storage features
Glove box and console boxes
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.
■ Power back door main switch
The power back door main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 33)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console boxes
■ Using the console box
Front
Open
Close
Rear (if equipped)
Pull up the knob to release the
lock.
Lift the armrest to open.
268
3-5. Using the storage features
Console boxes
■ Adjusting the position of the console box (front)
Open the cup holder lid on the
console box.
Adjust the position of the box
while lifting the lock release
lever.
CAUTION
■ Console box adjustment precaution
3
● Do not adjust the position of the console box while the vehicle is moving.
● Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the front console box and the
center panel or rear seat.
● Be careful not to allow the front console box to hit any passengers while adjusting its
position.
● After adjusting the console box, make sure it is securely locked in position.
■ Removing the adapter tray
Pull up.
■ Console box light (front)
The console box light turn on when the tail lights are turned on.
269
Interior features
This may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and may lead to an accident that
results in death or serious injury.
3-5. Using the storage features
Console boxes and overhead console
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may
warp or become cracked.
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
■ Maximum storage weight
Do not place any object heavier than 0.22 lb. (100 g) in it.
The console may be opened and cause injury.
270
3-5. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Cup holders
Front (type A)
To open, press in and release the
front cup holder.
Front (type B-1)
To open, press down and release
the rear of the cup holder lid.
3
Interior features
Front (type B-2)
To open, press down and release
the rear of the cup holder lid.
Rear
To open, press down the button on
the armrest.
271
3-5. Using the storage features
Cup holders and door pockets
■ Cup holder light (front-type B)
The cup holder light turn on when the tail lights are turned on.
■ Removing the separate tray (front-type B-2)
Pull up.
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Door pockets
The door pocket can be opened
and closed.
272
3-5. Using the storage features
Door pockets
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
3
Interior features
273
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
At this position, the visors can be
slid backward.
274
3-6. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
Open
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
Adjust the brightness of the
light
3
Interior features
275
3-6. Other interior features
Clock
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
■ The clock is displayed when
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
276
3-6. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
Displays the outside air temperature
The temperature range that can
be displayed is from -22°F
(-30°C) to 122°F (50°C).
■ If the temperature does not appear or it shows
3
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
277
Interior features
■ Display
3-6. Other interior features
Multi-display light control
Adjusts the brightness of the
light
Push and release the button until
the desired brightness is
obtained.
278
3-6. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for a following component.
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
115 VAC: Accessories that uses less than 100 W.
On center cluster (12 V)
3
Interior features
Tray under the front console box (12 V)
Luggage compartment (12 V)
279
3-6. Other interior features
Luggage compartment (115 VAC)*
Main switch
To use the power outlet, turn
on the main switch.
Power outlet socket
*: If equipped
■ The power outlet can be used when
12 V
The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.
115 VAC
The engine switch is in the ON position.
280
3-6. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
115 VAC
Do not use a 115 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 115 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection
circuit will cut the power supply.
3
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (115 VAC)
The following 115 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
281
Interior features
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
3-6. Other interior features
Seat heaters (if equipped)
Pops the switch out
“L”: Driver’s seat
“R”: Front passenger’s seat
ON
The indicator light comes on.
Adjusts the seat temperature
The further you turn the knob
clockwise, the warmer the seat
becomes.
■ The seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in the ON position.
■ When not in use
Turn the knob counterclockwise. The indicator light turns off.
Press the knob into the recessed position.
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
282
3-6. Other interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
3
Interior features
283
3-6. Other interior features
Armrest
■ Front
Pull the armrest down for use.
■ Rear
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
284
3-6. Other interior features
Floor mat
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
Secure the driver’s floor mat
using the hooks provided.
3
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct
side faces upward.
● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
285
Interior features
■ When inserting the floor mat
3-6. Other interior features
Luggage compartment features
■ Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■ Auxiliary box
To lift the luggage mat up,
press down the button.
An auxiliary box is under the
luggage mat.
■ Shopping bag hooks
286
3-6. Other interior features
■ Luggage cover
STEP 1
Attach the hooks to the head
restraints.
STEP 2
Pull out the luggage cover and
hook it onto the anchors.
3
Interior features
Removing luggage cover
Push
Lift up
After removing the luggage cover,
stow it in the auxiliary box or place
it somewhere other than the passenger compartment.
287
3-6. Other interior features
Automatic retract function of luggage cover
The knob is in the active position, the luggage cover is retracted automatically when the back door is opened.
Active position
Inactive position
CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
NOTICE
■ Shopping bag hook weight capacity
Do not hang any object heavier than 4 lb. (2 kg) on shopping bag hooks.
288
3-6. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and
other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Interior features
Buttons
Indicator
■ Programming HomeLink
STEP 1
3
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
289
3-6. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink button”
instructions. (P. 292)
STEP 3
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4
290
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
3-6. Other interior features
■ Programming a rolling code system
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the training button.
STEP 2
Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.

STEP 3 Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver start to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
291
Interior features
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
3
3-6. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
292
3-6. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■ Before programming
3
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
the HomeLinkbutton.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control devices
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards. This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
293
Interior features
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
3-6. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press the switch.
■ Displays and directions
294
Display
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
3-6. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
3
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press the switch until a number
STEP 2
(1 to 15) appears on the compass
display.
STEP 3
Press the switch, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
295
Interior features
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
3-6. Other interior features
■ Circling calibration
When C appears on the display,
drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference
by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a
large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
296
3-6. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
3
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
297
Interior features
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
3-6. Other interior features
298
Maintenance and care
4
4-1. Maintenance and
care .............................. 300
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance ................. 312
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 300
Do-it-yourself service
precautions............................ 312
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............. 303
Hood........................................... 315
Positioning a floor jack .......... 316
Engine compartment ............ 318
4-2. Maintenance .................. 306
Tires............................................ 332
Maintenance
requirements ........................ 306
Tire inflation pressure........... 340
General maintenance ......... 308
Air conditioning filter ........... 346
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs.................................. 311
Wireless remote control
battery.................................... 349
Wheels...................................... 344
Rear seat entertainment
system controller ................. 351
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 353
Headlight aim
(vehicles with discharge
headlights) ............................ 365
Light bulbs................................ 366
299
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
300
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:
• Fold the mirrors back.
• Remove the antenna.
• Turn the power back door system off.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm
your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows and the air suspension unit (if equipped).
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
■ Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes
or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same
mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
4
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
301
Maintenance and care
■ To prevent deterioration and corrosion
4-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■ Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■ If the windshield washer nozzle become blocked
Contact your Lexus dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object.
This may damage the nozzle.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper
arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to
their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■ When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with the rain-sensing windshield
wipers)
Off
302
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in AUTO, the wipers may
operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
303
Maintenance and care
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
4
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 80)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or severe injury.
304
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
● Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.
● Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
305
Maintenance and care
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
4
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
306
4-2. Maintenance
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the lat-
est service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been per-
formed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■ Warning in handling of battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 328)
307
Maintenance and care
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
4
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of
your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
308
Check points
Battery
Maintenance-free.
(P. 328)
Brake fluid
At the correct level? (P. 325)
Engine coolant
At the correct level? (P. 324)
Engine oil
At the correct level? (P. 320)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Power steering fluid
At the correct level? (P. 327)
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 325)
Washer fluid
At the correct level?
(P. 331)
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be hold securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 365)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Maintenance and care
Head restraints
4
309
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Door
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
310
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
4
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
311
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
312
Parts and tools
(P. 328)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
(P. 325)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
(P. 324)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 320)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 353)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Headlight aim
(P. 365)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Power steering fluid level
(P. 327)
Radiator and condenser
(P. 325)
Tire inflation pressure
(P. 340)
(P. 331)

4
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Maintenance and care
Washer fluid
• Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON®II or III
• Rag or paper towel
• Clean funnel
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
313
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury:
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the ignition is off.
With the ignition on, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air
conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(P. 325)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner:
Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in
the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
314
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
4
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
315
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear (2WD models)
Rear (4WD models)
316
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle:
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.
4
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
lever in P.
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension:
Be sure to turn off the height control and stop the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may change in the automatic leveling function. (P. 169)
317
Maintenance and care
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 327)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 320)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 320)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 325)
Fuse box
(P. 353)
318
Battery
(P. 328)
Radiator
(P. 325)
Condenser
(P. 325)
Electric cooling fans
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 324)
Washer fluid tank
(P. 331)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
■ Installing the clips
Open
Insert
Press
4
Maintenance and care
319
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait
more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
320
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Oil grade
Items
STEP 1
STEP 2
Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
4
It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on the
dipstick.
■ Recommended viscosity
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy, and good
starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available,
SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
321
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to read oil container labels
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the
oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent
acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have
become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km)
● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km),
contact your Lexus dealer.
■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
STEP 1 Switch the display to the odometer. (P. 130)
STEP 2 Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.
STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, turn the engine switch to the
ON position. Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter
displays 000000.
322
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage:
Check the oil level on regular basis.
4
■ When replacing the engine oil
Maintenance and care
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.
323
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines
on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
Full
Low
If the level is on or below the LOW
line, add coolant up to the FULL
line.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■ Coolant selection
Only use Toyota Super Long Life Coolant or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: Toyota Super Long Life Coolant is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
324
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damaging parts or paint.
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
4
■ When the engine is hot
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the MAX and MIN lines
on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
325
Maintenance and care
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding fluid
Fluid type
Items
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
326
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Power steering fluid
■ Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about five hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C])
Maintenance and care
■ Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III
Items
Rag or paper, Clean funnel (only for adding fluid)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
4
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again.
Check the fluid level.
327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When checking the reservoir
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■ When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■ After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Checking battery condition
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Type A
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Red: Not working properly,
have the battery checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Type B
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
329
4
Maintenance and care
Green: Good condition
Dark: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Clear or light yellow: Not working properly, have the battery
checked by your Lexus dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery:
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safety charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw
egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
330
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
low washer fluid warning light
comes on, the washer tank may be
empty. Add washer fluid.
4
■ When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
331
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
inflation pressure if not rotated.
■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
Front
Lexus recommends tire rotation
in accordance with the maintenance schedule to equalize tire
wear and extend tire life.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system after
tire rotation.
■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 394)
332
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 334)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
● When changing the tire size.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
STEP 1 Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure
level. (P. 430)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
STEP 3
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
333
Maintenance and care
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly three times.
STEP 4
STEP 5
Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch is in the ON position, and then turn the engine switch OFF.
Registering and selecting ID codes
■ Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can
switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure
warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new
set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
334
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire
setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly.
After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light
comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
“MAIN”
“2nd”
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
4
Tires should be replaced if:
ric or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or loca-
tion of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
335
Maintenance and care
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fab-
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to
use snow tires or snow chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a
speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 340, 436).
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 183)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
336
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning
light does not flash 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
337
Maintenance and care
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
338
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
4
Maintenance and care
339
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 430)
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
4
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
341
Maintenance and care
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire
inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
342
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing
death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
4
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
343
Maintenance and care
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling
control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and offset.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
Lexus does not recommend using:
• Wheels of different sizes or types
• Used wheels
• Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 333)
344
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
4
Maintenance and care
345
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■ Removal method
STEP 1 Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.
Open the glove box.
STEP 2
Remove the 2 pins installed on
the upper part of the glove box
and lower the glove box.
STEP 3
346
Remove the filter case.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the
filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at
72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2
or bar).
If it is not available, have the
filter cleaned by your Lexus
dealer.
■ Replacement method
The UP marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or
early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
347
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system
● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wireless remote control battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR2016)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Remove the screw and cover.
Push the cover in the arrow
direction.
STEP 2
Remove the module.
STEP 3
Open the case cover and
remove the depleted battery.
4
349
Maintenance and care
Insert a new battery with the +
terminal facing up.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR2016 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear seat entertainment system controller
Replace the batteries with new them if they are discharged.
■ Necessary item for replacing:
3 AA batteries
■ Replacing the batteries
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
STEP 2
Remove the depleted batteries
and install the new them.
4
Maintenance and care
■ If the batteries are discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The rear seat entertainment system control will not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ When using 3 AA batteries
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, electric appliance shop, or
camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
Driver's side
panel
Remove the lid.
STEP 4
4
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 355) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
353
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
instrument
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type B and C
Type B
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment
Fuse
Circuit
60
Electronically modulated air suspension
100
HEATER, TAIL, PANEL, FR FOG,
CIG, RADIO NO. 2, ECU-ACC,
PWR OUTLET NO. 1, GAUGE NO.
1, ECU-IG NO.1, FR WIP, RR WIP,
WASHER, SEAT HTR, ECU-IG NO.
2, P/SEAT, PWR, TI&TE, RR DOOR
LH, RR DOOR RH, MPX-B, AM1,
DOOR NO.2, STOP, OBD, FUEL
OPN, AIRSUS (7.5 A), S/ROOF, FR
DEF, RR FOG
1
INP-J/B*2
4
*1: With electronically modulated air suspension
*2: Without electronically modulated air suspension
355
Maintenance and care
AIRSUS*1
Ampere
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
2
ALT
140
INP-J/B, AIRSUS (60 A), ABS NO. 1,
ABS NO. 2, RDI FAN, RR DEF,
HEATER, PBD, H-LP CLN/MSB, HLP CLN, POWER OUTLET NO. 2,
TOWING, TAIL, PANEL, FR FOG,
CIG, RADIO NO. 2, ECU-ACC,
PWR OUTLET NO. 1, GAUGE NO.
1, ECU-IG NO. 1, FR WIP, RR WIP,
WASHER, HEATER, SEAT HTR,
ECU-IG NO. 2, P/SEAT, PWR, CRT,
TI&TE, RR DOOR LH, RR DOOR
RH, MPX-B, AM1, DOOR NO. 2,
STOP, OBD, FUEL OPN, AIRSUS
(7.5 A), S/ROOF, FR DEF, RR FOG
3
PBD
30
Power back door
H-LP CLN/MSB*1
30
Headlight cleaner
H-LP CLN*2
30
Headlight cleaner
5
ABS NO. 1
30
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system, brake assist system
6
RR DEF
40
Rear window defogger
7
HEATER
50
Air conditioning system, rear window
defogger
8
DRL/WIP-S
7.5
Daytime running light system
9
H-LP L LWR
15
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
10
H-LP L UPR
15
Left-hand headlight (high beam)
11
H-LP R UPR
15
Right-hand headlight (high beam)
4
1
* : With electronically modulated air suspension
*2: Without electronically modulated air suspension
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
12
TOWING
30
Trailer lights
13
CRT
7.5
Audio system
14
ABS NO. 2
50
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction control system, brake assist system
15
RDI FAN
50
Electric cooling fans
16
HAZ
15
Turn signal lights
17
A/F
25
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
18
ALT-S
7.5
Charging system
ETCS
10
20
HORN
10
Horns
21
MAIN
40
Daytime running light system, lefthand headlight, right-hand headlight,
H-LP R LWR, H-LP R UPR, H-LP L
UPR, H-LP L LWR, DRL
22
AM2
30
Starting system, GAUGE NO. 2,
IGN, IG2
23
RADIO NO. 1
15
Audio system, navigation system
4
Maintenance and care
19
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
24
ECU-B
Ampere
Circuit
7.5
Power window, multiplex communication system, gauge and meters, instrument cluster lights, instrument panel
lights, air conditioning system, garage
door opener, illuminated entry system,
wireless remote control system,
power back door, driving position
memory system, navigation system
display, moon roof, tilt and telescopic
steering, power seats, outside rear
view mirror, windshield wipers
25
DOME
7.5
Gauge and meters, personal lights,
vanity lights, door courtesy lights,
inside door handle lights, engine
switch light, foot well lighting, scuff
lighting, luggage compartment light,
interior light
26
AMP
30
Audio system
27
DOOR NO. 1
25
Multiplex communication system
28
INJ
10
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
25
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO. 2
29
358
EFI NO. 1
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
30
H-LP R LWR
15
Right-hand headlight (low beam)
31
PWR OUTLET
NO. 2
20
Power outlet
10
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
32
EFI NO. 2
Circuit
4
Maintenance and care
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse
360
Ampere
Circuit
1
RR DOOR RH
20
Rear right side power window
2
RR DOOR LH
20
Rear left side power window
3
FUEL OPN
7.5
Fuel filler door opener
4
FR FOG
15
Front fog lights
5
OBD
7.5
On-board diagnosis system
6
FR DEF
25
Windshield wiper de-icer, MIR HTR
7
STOP
10
Tail lights, high mounted stoplight, rear
light failure warning light, anti-lock
brake system, vehicle stability control
system, traction control system, brake
assist system, electronically modulated air suspension, shift lock control
system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
8
TI&TE
30
Tilt and telescopic steering
9
MPX-B
7.5
Security system
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
AM1
7.5
Starter system
11
RR FOG
7.5
No circuit
12
AIR SUS
7.5
Electronically modulated air suspension
13
DOOR NO. 2
25
Multiplex communication system
14
S/ROOF
30
Moon roof
10
Front fog lights, instrument cluster
lights, instrument panel lights, front
side marker lights, tail lights, licence
plate lights, towing converter
7.5
Glove box light, instrument cluster
lights, instrument panel lights, console
box light, audio system, power outlet,
garage door opener switch, electronically controlled automatic transmission system, headlight cleaner,
electronically modulated air suspension, seat heaters, steering wheel
audio switches, power back door
15
16
TAIL
PANEL
361
4
Maintenance and care
10
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
17
18
ECU-IG NO. 1
ECU-IG NO. 2
Ampere
Circuit
7.5
Power rear view mirror control, moon
roof, multiplex communication system,
navigation system display, shift lock
control system, multiplex communication system (power door lock system,
wireless remote control system), driving position memory system, vehicle
stability control system, traction control system, windshield wipers, electronically controlled automatic
transmission, seat heaters, power
seats, tilt and telescopic steering,
power back door, electronically modulated air suspension
10
Automatic headlight leveling system,
vehicle stability control system,
dynamic laser cruise control, headlight cleaner, adaptive front-lighting
system
19
HEATER
7.5
Electric cooling fans, air conditioning
system, rear window defogger, engine
switch, windshield wiper de-icer
20
WASHER
20
Windshield washer
21
SEAT HTR
20
Seat heaters
22
GAUGE NO.1
7.5
Instrument cluster lights, instrument
panel lights, emergency flashers, seat
belt, power outlet, rear light failure
warning light, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, back-up lights
23
FR WIP
30
Windshield wipers
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
24
RR WIP
15
Rear window wiper
25
IG2
7.5
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
26
IGN
10
SRS airbag system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, front passenger
occupant classification system, stop
lights
27
GAUGE NO. 2
7.5
Gauge and meters
7.5
Navigation system display, power rear
view mirror control, shift lock control
system, multiplex communication system
28
ECU-ACC
CIG
15
Cigarette lighter, power outlet
30
PWR OUTLET
NO. 1
15
Power outlet
Maintenance and care
29
31
RADIO NO. 2
7.5
Instrument cluster lights, instrument
panel lights, navigation system, audio
system
32
MIR HTR
10
Outside rear view mirror defogger
33
P/SEAT
30
Power seats
30
Power window, multiplex communication system (power door lock system,
wireless remote control system), outside rear view mirror
34
PWR
4
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (P. 366)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights)
■ Vertical movement adjusting screw and bolt
Adjustment screw
Adjustment bolt
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
STEP 2
Turn the bolt the same number
of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a Phillipshead screwdriver.
If the error is over the value
specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
365
4
Maintenance and care
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
Turn the screw in either direcSTEP 1
tion using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 432)
■ Remove the engine compartment cover.
P. 319
■ Turn the power back door main switch OFF.
P. 33
■ Front bulb locations
Front turn
signal light
Parking light
CLY43AA064
Headlight
high beam
(halogen bulb)
Fog light
366
Front side
marker light
Headlight
low beam
(halogen bulb)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear bulb locations
Tail light
Back-up light
CLY43AA065
Rear turn
signal light
License
plate light
Tail light
Rear side
marker light
Replacing light bulbs
4
STEP 2
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
367
Maintenance and care
■ Headlight high beam (halogen bulb)
Turn the bulb base counterclockSTEP 1
wise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Headlight low beam (halogen bulb)
Turn the cover counterclockwise.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
■ Front turn signal lights
STEP 1
368
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Remove the light bulb.
■ Front side marker lights
STEP 1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
■ Rear side marker lights
STEP 1
Right-hand side only:
Remove the bolts using a Phillipshead screwdriver and remove the
clips.
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Removing clip
Installing clip
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
■ Parking lights
STEP 1
370
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Remove the light bulb.
■ Fog lights
There are access holes for the fog
lights.
4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 2
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
371
Maintenance and care
STEP 1
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear turn signal and tail lights
STEP 1
Remove the access hole cover.
Use a flathead screwdriver which is
wrapped with a cloth.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Tail light
Rear turn signal light
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
■ Tail and back-up lights
STEP 1
372
Open the back door and remove
the luggage compartment light
unit.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Pull out the connector.
STEP 3
Remove the upper trim board.
STEP 4
Remove the lower trim board.
4
Maintenance and care
STEP 5
Tail light
Back-up light
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Remove the light bulb.
■ License plate lights
STEP 1
Open the back door and remove
the luggage compartment light
unit.
STEP 2
Pull out the connector.
STEP 3
Remove the upper trim board.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 5
Remove the light bulb.
● Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs)
● Stop lights
● High mounted stoplight
375
4
Maintenance and care
■ Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■ LED stop lights
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the
LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
If two or more LEDs in a stop light burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local
laws (SAE).
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them.
Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight
unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the
lens.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight bulbs,
connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■ Discharge headlights
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
4
bulbs).
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
377
Maintenance and care
● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
378
When trouble arises
5
5-1. Essential information .... 380
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ................................ 380
If you think something
is wrong .................................. 387
Fuel pump shut off
system..................................... 388
Event data recorder.............. 389
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency .................... 391
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... .................................. 391
If you have a flat tire............... 402
If the engine will not start ..... 412
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ........................ 413
If you lose your keys ............... 414
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................. 415
If your vehicle overheats ...... 418
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 420
379
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If towing from the front, the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles must be in good
condition. (P. 384)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet(s). This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
Towing eyelets
380
5-1. Essential information
■ Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Turn the engine switch to the ACC (engine off) or ON (engine running)
position.
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
5
When trouble arises
381
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelets
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover.
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 402
382
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may
lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
5
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
When trouble arises
383
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front (2WD models)
Release the parking brake.
From the front (4WD models)
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheel.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle.
Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (4WD models)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
384
5-1. Essential information
From rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
Using a flat bed truck
Front
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
385
When trouble arises
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
5
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelets.
386
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
387
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
STEP 1
Turn the engine switch to the ACC to LOCK position.
STEP 2
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
388
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data
recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near
car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
● Engine speed
● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
● Vehicle speed
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● Position of the transmission shift lever
5
● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
● Front passenger’s occupant classification
● SRS airbag deployment data
● SRS airbag system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR
does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
389
When trouble arises
● Driver's seat position
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
● Officially requested by the police or other authorities
● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
● Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Lexus will:
● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
390
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
(U.S.A.) • Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
(Canada)
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5
km/h) or more.
5
When trouble arises
391
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates an abnormal level of engine oil pressure.
This warning light may turn on if the level of engine oil
declines. The light should turn off after checking the oil and
adding oil if necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
(U.S.A.)
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
392
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS;
(Canada)
• The brake assist system.
(U.S.A.)
Rear light failure warning light
Indicates a malfunction in tail lights.
(4WD models)
(Vehicles with
discharge
headlights)
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature
is too high.
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling
system.
5
When trouble arises
393
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that one or more of
the doors is not fully closed.
The system also indicates
which doors are not fully
Close the indicated doors.
closed.
The warning light flashes to
indicate that one or more of
the doors is not fully closed
(with the vehicle having
reached a speed of 3 mph [5
km/h]).
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
Refuel the vehicle.
(Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L,
2.4 Imp.gal.] or less)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light (warning
buzzer)*3
Fasten the seat belt.
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
394
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system
Low washer fluid warning
light
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
Engine oil replacement
reminder light
(U.S.A)
Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for
Check and the engine oil, and
about 12 seconds: Indicates
change if necessary.
that the engine oil is scheduled
to be changed.
(if equipped)
Dynamic laser cruise control
master warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the
dynamic laser cruise control
P. 158
system. When the light
comes on, the alarm sounds
and the warning code will
appear on the display.
395
When trouble arises
Comes on and remains: IndiCheck and change the engine
cates that the engine oil should
oil.
be changed.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) or more with any door open.
*2: Driver’s seat belt reminder:
The driver’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt
is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON or START position,
the buzzer sounds for 4 to 8 seconds. If the vehicle has reached a speed of at
least 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds. Then,
if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20
more seconds.
*3: Front passenger’s seat belt reminder:
The front passenger’s seat belt reminder sounds to alert the front passenger that
his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if
the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20
more seconds.
■ Key reminder buzzer
The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed (with the engine switch in
the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).
■ Open moon roof reminder buzzer
The buzzer indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the engine switch in
the ACC or LOCK position and the driver's door opened).
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is your vehicle low on gas?
If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
396
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 320)
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tires is replaced with a spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
397
When trouble arises
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or
wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used.
● If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.
● If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
luggage compartment.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
when the engine switch is turned to ON position, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer.
398
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
5
When trouble arises
399
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
400
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
401
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Wrench
Spare tire
Jack handle
Adapter socket
Towing eyelet
Tool bag
402
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack and tools
STEP 1
Pull up the front deck board.
STEP 2
Hold the front deck board with the
supporting rod.
When closing the board, return the
supporting rod to its stored position.
STEP 3
Unhook
Loosen
Tighten
5
When trouble arises
403
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1
Remove the inside spare tire cover.
STEP 2
Open the right side auxiliary box.
STEP 3
Remove the cover.
To protect the auxiliary box, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the auxiliary box, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 4
404
Attach the adapter socket (for
removing a spare tire).
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 5
Connect the jack handle and the
adapter socket. Turn the jack handle.
The tire will lower completely to
the ground.
STEP 6
Pull out the spare tire and stand it
up against the bumper.
STEP 7
Remove the holding bracket.
5
When trouble arises
405
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Left-hand
side
Front
Righthand side
Left-hand
side
Rear
Righthand side
STEP 2
STEP 3
406
Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
5
When trouble arises
407
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
STEP 1
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
STEP 2
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Washer
Wheel nut
Tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into loose
contact with the disc wheel sheet.
Disc wheel
STEP 3
STEP 4
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
408
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Install the inside spare tire cover on the outer side of the spare tire
cover.
Put the flat tire in the spare tire
cover with the outer side facing up
and install the holding bracket.
Turn the spare tire clamp bolt clockwise with a jack handle and
adapter socket until you hear a click.
Stow all the tools and jack securely.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 333)
5
When trouble arises
409
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● Vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension: Be sure to turn off the
height control and stop the engine.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
410
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■ When stowing the flat tire
● Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle underbody.
● Tighten the spare tire clamp bolt to hold the spare wheel carrier by the hook
securely.
5
When trouble arises
411
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 120), consider each of the following points.
■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel your vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 120)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 72)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 415)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 415)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
412
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the engine switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
5
When trouble arises
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
413
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Lexus dealer. Bring a master key
and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
414
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 319)
STEP 2
Connecting the jumper cables.
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and start the
vehicle’s engine.
5
When trouble arises
415
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible.
STEP 5
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
The power windows and power back door must be initialized.
(P. 451)
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
416
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
5
417
When trouble arises
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air
conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and inspect
the radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
Add engine coolant if required.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant
is unavailable. (P. 426)
418
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is
running.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
419
When trouble arises
NOTICE
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in
P.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and/or VSC if these functions are hampering your
attempts to free the vehicle. ( P. 165)
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
420
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications................. 422
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 422
Fuel information..................... 433
Tire information...................... 436
6-2. Customization................ 447
Customizable features ........ 447
6-3. Initialization .................... 451
Items to initialize ..................... 451
421
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height *
186.2 in. (4730 mm)
72.6 in (1845 mm)
1
2WD models
65.7 in. (1670 mm) *2
67.3 in. (1710 mm) *3
67.9 in. (1725 mm) *4
4WD models*5
65.7 in. (1670 mm) *2
67.3 in. (1710 mm) *3
67.9 in (1725 mm) *4
4WD models*6
Wheelbase
2WD models -Front
-Rear
Tread
66.1 in (1680 mm) *2
67.7 in. (1720 mm) *3
68.3 in. (1735 mm) *4
106.9 in. (2715 mm)
62.2 in. (1580 mm)
61.6 in. (1565 mm)
4WD models*5 -Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)
-Rear 61.4 in. (1560 mm)
4WD models*6 -Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)
-Rear 61.2 in. (1555 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
Towing capacity
(Trailer weight + cargo)
925 lb. (420 kg)
Without towing pack2000 lb. (907 kg)
age
With towing package 3500 lb. (1588 kg)
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: Vehicle without roof rails
*3: Vehicle with roof rails
*4: Vehicle with roof rails and cross rails
*5: Vehicle with electronically modulated air suspension
*6: Vehicle without electronically modulated air suspension
422
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and under the
front passenger’s seat (on some models).
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
Vehicle specifications
423
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
Engine
Model
2GR-FE
Type
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 3.27 in.
(94  83 mm)
Displacement
210.1 cu.in.
(3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
19.2 gal. (72.5 L, 15.9 lmp.gal)
424
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(drain and refill)
With filter
6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 lmp.qt.)
Without filter
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity.
Recommended oil
viscosity
Outside temperature
5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.
Oil viscosity
● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of
the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W
allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
425
Vehicle specifications
● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the
vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
6
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
8.9 qt. (8.4L, 7.4 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
DENSO
Gap
FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only Lexus genuine iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning
engine.
426
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the key is
removed with all the lights turned off)
Charging rates
5 A max.
Rear differential (4WD models)
Oil capacity
1.0 qt. (0.9 L, 0.8 lmp.qt.)
Oil type and
viscosity
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above 0F (-18C): SAE90
Below 0F (-18C): SAE80W or SAE80W-90
6
Vehicle specifications
427
6-1. Specifications
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
3.7 qt. (3.5 L, 3.1 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer (4WD models)
Oil capacity
1.0 qt. (0.9 L, 0.8 Imp.qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above 0F (-18C): SAE90
Below 0F (-18C): SAE80W or SAE80W90
428
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance *1
3.1 in. (80 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.079  0.118 in. (2  3 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *2
5  7 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50
kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Parking
brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
6
Vehicle specifications
429
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II
or III
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size
225/65R17 101S
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Tire inflation pressure
Spare:
(Recommended cold tire inflation 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160
pressure)
km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 1.5 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the
front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the
maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17  6 1/2 J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
430
6-1. Specifications
Type B
Tire size
P235/55R18 99V
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
Tire inflation pressure
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire inflation Rear:
pressure)
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size
18  7 JJ, 18  7 J
Wheel nut torque
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6
Vehicle specifications
431
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
Headlights (low beam)
Discharge bulbs
Halogen bulbs


35
55
A
B
Front turn signal lights

21
C
Headlights (high beam)
9005
60
D
168
5
E
9006
51
F
Front side marker lights
168
5
E
Rear turn signal lights

21
C
Tail lights
168
5
E
Licence plate lights
168
5
E
Back-up lights
921
16
E
Rear side marker lights
194
3.8
E
Vanity lights

2.8
G
Personal lights

8
H
Interior lights

8
G
Luggage compartment lights

5
G
Door courtesy lights

5
H
Parking lights
Exterior
Interior
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
H:
432
Fog lights
D2S discharge bulbs
H11 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
HB3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
HB4 halogen bulbs
Double end bulbs
Single end bulbs
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If premium gasoline is not available
If 91 rating gasoline cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91).
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or
driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
6
Vehicle specifications
433
6-1. Specifications
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a speci-
fication for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission lev-
els. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and cus-
tomer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid
build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than
87.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
434
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on gasoline quality
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol.
It can damage your vehicle's paint.
6
Vehicle specifications
435
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 438)
(P. 437)
(P. 332)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
436
(P. 336)
(P. 430)
6-1. Specifications
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 336)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
6
Vehicle specifications
437
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
438
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
439
6
Vehicle specifications
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
6-1. Specifications
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
440
6-1. Specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
441
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
442
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
443
Vehicle specifications
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
6
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
444
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
)
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
445
6
Vehicle specifications
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Signal Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
11 through 15
16 through 20
446
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Item
Function
Unlocking operation
Wireless
remote control
(P. 24)
Automatic door lock
function to be activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
Customized
setting
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
ON
OFF
30 seconds
60 seconds
6
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
ON
OFF
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
ON
OFF
Vehicle specifications
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
Default setting
447
6-2. Customization
Item
Wireless
remote control
(P. 24)
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Buzzer sounds when
pushing LOCK with any
door not closed
ON
OFF
Power back door operation
Push and hold
Panic function
One short push*
ON
OFF
Push and hold
One short push
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
OFF
Operation signal volume
OFF
Switch operation
Power back
door
(P. 32)
Push twice*
High
Low
Operation when door
locks
Possible
Impossible
Assistance of opening
with door opener
OFF
ON
Level 1
Level 2 to 4
Sensitivity of jam protection function
*:It is possible to select them only when the power back door operation with
the open/close switch is made impossible when the door is locked.
448
6-2. Customization
Item
Default setting
Customized
setting
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step.
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
OFF
ON
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
OFF
ON
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors.
ON
OFF
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors.
ON
OFF
Linked door lock/unlock
operation
ON
OFF
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
(open only)
OFF
Linked door lock/unlock
operation
ON
OFF
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
(open only)
OFF
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Function
Unlocking using a key
Door lock
(P. 27)
Power
windows
(P. 62)
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 139)
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
6
0 second
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
449
Vehicle specifications
Moon roof
(standard
type)
(P. 65)
6-2. Customization
Item
Windshield
wipers and
washer
(P. 143)
Illumination
(P. 262)
Steering
wheel
(P. 56)
450
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Switching operation when
the vehicle is stationary
ON
OFF
Time elapsed before lights
turn off
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are opened
ON
OFF
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
ON
OFF
Operation after the
engine is off
ON
OFF
Automatic tilt-away steering column
ON
OFF
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.
Item
When to initialize
Reference
Power window
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse
P. 62
Power back door
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse
P. 32
Moon roof
(Multi-panel type only)
• After reconnecting or changing the
battery
• After changing a fuse
P. 65
Engine oil maintenance
data
After changing engine oil
P. 320
Tire pressure warning
system
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling speed
or load weight, etc.
• When changing the tire size.
P. 332
6
Vehicle specifications
451
6-3. Initialization
452
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 454
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................. 455
453
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
454
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
7
For owners
455
Guide confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)
Si la sangle diagonale gêne la personne au niveau du cou, utilisez le guide
confort de la ceinture de sécurité.
ÉTAPE 1
Sortez le guide confort de sa
poche.
ÉTAPE 2
Engagez la ceinture dans le guide.
Le cordon élastique doit passer
sous la ceinture de sécurité.
ÉTAPE 3
456
Bouclez la ceinture de sécurité,
puis positionnez-la et lâchez-la.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
7
For owners
457
458
Index
Abbreviation list .................... 460
Alphabetical index................. 462
What to do if... ....................... 473
For details of equipment related to the navigation system
and touch screen, such as the air conditioning and audio
systems, refer to the “Navigation System Owner's
Manual”.
459
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
2WD
2 Wheel Drive
4WD
4 Wheel Drive
A/C
Air Conditioning
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
ACC
Accessory
AFS
Adaptive Front-lighting System
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS
Child Restraint System
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event data recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M
Emission inspection and maintenance
INFO
Information
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S
Mud and Snow
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
460
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
461
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C ........................................................... 200
ABS.............................................................. 164
Adaptive front lighting
system...................................................... 140
AFS .............................................................. 140
Air conditioning filter ..........................346
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter .......................346
Automatic air conditioning
system..................................................200
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions........... 82
Airbag precautions for your
child.......................................................... 87
Airbag warning light ........................392
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions..............................................83
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................................... 87
Front passenger occupant
classification system......................... 92
General airbag precautions ........... 87
Locations of airbags............................80
Modification and disposal of
airbags......................................................91
Proper driving posture ............. 78, 87
Side airbag operating
conditions..............................................83
Side airbag precautions .................... 87
SRS airbags .............................................80
Alarm ............................................................ 74
Antenna ..................................................... 213
Anti-lock brake system ....................... 164
Armrest.....................................................284
462
Audio system
Antenna.................................................... 213
CD player/changer........................... 216
MP3/WMA disc................................222
Optimal use ......................................... 230
Radio ....................................................... 209
Steering wheel audio switch.........233
Automatic air conditioning
system ....................................................200
Automatic headlight leveling
system ....................................................... 141
Automatic light control
system ......................................................139
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission ................... 123
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................................... 413
S mode ..................................................... 125
B Back door
Back door .................................................32
Wireless remote control ...................24
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Wattage ..................................................432
Battery
Checking............................................... 328
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ...................................................415
Preparing and checking before
winter .....................................................183
Alphabetical index
Brake
Fluid.......................................................... 325
Parking brake........................................129
Brake assist...............................................164
Break-in tips .............................................. 113
Brightness control
Multi-display light control ............. 278
C Care
Exterior ...................................................300
Interior.....................................................303
Seat belts ...............................................304
Cargo capacity ....................................... 179
Cargo hooks .......................................... 286
CD changer
CD ..............................................................216
MP3 disc ................................................222
WMA disc .............................................222
CD player.................................................. 216
Chains.........................................................185
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition.....................97
Booster seats, installation................. 101
Convertible seats, definition ............97
Convertible seats, installation ........ 101
Front passenger occupant
classification system .........................92
Infant seats, definition ..........................97
Infant seats, installation....................... 101
Installing CRS with lower
anchorages.........................................104
Installing CRS with seatbelts .......... 101
Installing CRS with top straps.......106
Child safety
Airbag precautions..............................87
Battery precautions ............... 330, 417
Child restraint system......................... 97
Child-protectors ...................................28
How your child should wear the
seatbelt......................................................51
Installing child restraints...................100
Moon roof precautions......................68
Power window lock switch..............62
Power window precautions ............64
Removed rear seat entertainment
system controller battery............352
Removed wireless remote control
battery precautions ...................... 350
Seat belt comfort guide .....................48
Seat belt extender precautions......54
Seat belt precautions ..........................52
Seat heater precautions..................282
Child-protectors......................................28
Cleaning
Exterior...................................................300
Interior .................................................... 303
Seat belts............................................... 304
Clock ......................................................... 276
Compass ..................................................294
Condenser ..............................................325
Console box ...........................................268
Cooling system
Engine overheating............................ 418
463
Alphabetical index
Cruise control
Cruise control ...................................... 150
Dynamic laser cruise control.........154
Cup holder ................................................271
Curtain shield airbags........................... 80
Customizable features ....................... 447
D Daytime running light system ........... 140
Defogger
Rear window........................................206
Side mirror ............................................206
Dimension................................................422
Dinghy towing.........................................198
Display
Dynamic laser cruise control.........154
Trip information....................................136
Do-it-yourself maintenance .............. 312
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights......................... 262
Wattage.................................................. 432
Door lock
Back door..................................................32
Side door ...................................................27
Wireless remote control....................24
Door pockets.......................................... 272
Doors
Back door..................................................32
Door glasses........................................... 62
Power back door ..................................32
Side door ...................................................27
Side mirrors.............................................58
Driver's seat belt reminder light .....394
464
Driving
Break-in tips.............................................113
Correct posture.....................................78
Off-road precautions........................ 174
Procedures............................................... 112
Winter driving tips..............................183
Driving position memory...................... 43
DVD player
Audio CD/CD text.......................... 250
DVD video............................................. 241
Initial setting.......................................... 255
MP3 discs............................................... 251
Video CD ............................................. 248
E Electronically modulated air
suspension..............................................169
Emergency, in case of
If the back door opener is in
operative................................................34
If the engine will not start................. 412
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.................................................... 413
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ...................................................415
If the warning buzzer sounds........391
If the warning light turns on............391
If you have a flat tire ........................ 402
If you lose your keys .......................... 414
If you think something is
wrong .................................................. 387
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 420
If your vehicle needs to be
towed...................................................380
If your vehicle overheats..................418
Alphabetical index
Engine
Compartment .......................................318
Engine switch ........................................120
Hood .........................................................315
How to start the engine....................120
Identification number....................... 423
If the engine will not start................. 412
Ignition switch........................................120
Overheating...........................................418
Engine compartment cover...............319
Engine coolant
Capacity................................................. 426
Checking............................................... 324
Preparing and checking before
winter .....................................................183
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................................130
Engine immobilizer system..................72
Engine oil
Capacity................................................. 425
Checking............................................... 320
Preparing and checking before
winter .....................................................183
Engine oil maintenance data............322
Event data recorder............................ 389
F
Floor mat ..................................................285
Fluid
Brake........................................................325
Power steering.................................... 327
Washer .................................................... 331
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Switch.........................................................142
Wattage..................................................432
Foot well lighting...................................262
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Switch.........................................................142
Wattage..................................................432
Front passenger's seat belt reminder
light..........................................................394
Front seats
Adjustment............................................... 37
Driving position memory..................43
Flattening seatbacks............................38
Front side marker light
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Wattage..................................................432
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Wattage..................................................432
Fuel
Capacity .................................................424
Fuel gauge..............................................130
Fuel pump shut off system............388
Gas station information..................476
Information ............................................433
Refueling....................................................69
Type ..........................................................433
465
Alphabetical index
Fuel door .....................................................69
Fuel filler door ...........................................69
Fuel pump shut off system................ 388
Fuses ..........................................................353
I
I/M test ........................................................ 311
Identification
Engine......................................................423
Vehicle.....................................................423
Ignition
Keys.............................................................. 22
Ignition switch
Ignition switch .......................................120
Ignition switch light
Ignition switch light............................262
Illuminated entry system.................... 263
Indicator lights .........................................132
Initialization
Items to initialize...................................451
Inside door handle lights ................... 262
Inside rear view mirror.......................... 57
Interior lights
Interior lights .........................................262
Switch...................................................... 265
Wattage ..................................................432
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack .....................316
Replacing the wheel ........................ 402
Jack handle .............................................402
G Garage door opener ..........................289
Gas station information...................... 476
Gauges ......................................................130
Glove box ................................................ 267
Glove box light ......................................268
H Head restraints
Adjusting .................................................. 45
Headlight aim .........................................365
Headlight cleaner.................................. 149
Headlights
Discharge headlights
precautions ........................................377
Replacing light bulbs........................366
Switch ........................................................139
Wattage.................................................. 432
Heaters
Seat heaters..........................................282
Side mirror ............................................206
Height control
Electronically modulated air
suspension...........................................169
Hood ........................................................... 315
Hooks
Cargo hook..........................................286
Shopping bag hook .........................286
466
Alphabetical index
K Keyless entry..............................................24
Keys
Flat key................................................22, 121
If you lose your keys .......................... 414
Ignition switch........................................120
Key number..............................................22
Keyless entry............................................24
Keys..............................................................22
Wireless remote control key...........24
L
Laser cruise control ..............................154
Licence plate lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................366
Wattage ................................................. 432
Light bulbs
Replacing...............................................366
Wattage ................................................. 432
Lights
Door courtesy lights .........................262
Fog light switch..................................... 142
Headlights switch................................139
Engine switch light.............................262
Inside door handle lights ................262
Interior light switch............................ 265
Luggage compartment light............34
Meter ring light....................................262
Overhead courtesy light ................262
Personal light switch........................ 266
Replacing light bulbs .......................366
Scuff lighting..........................................262
Turn signal lever...................................128
Vanity lights...........................................275
Wattage ................................................. 432
Load capacity.......................................... 182
Lock steering column ............................121
Luggage compartment lights
Switch..........................................................34
Wattage..................................................432
Luggage cover ......................................... 286
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance............312
General maintenance ....................308
Maintenance data.............................. 422
Maintenance requirements ......... 306
Meter
Instrument panel light control......... 131
Meters.......................................................130
Meter ring light......................................262
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.......................57
Side mirror heater ............................ 206
Side mirrors ............................................ 58
Vanity mirrors......................................275
Moon roof...................................................65
MP3 disc .................................................. 222
Multi-display
Brightness control .............................278
467
Alphabetical index
O Odometer.................................................130
Off-road precautions............................174
Oil
Engine oil ...............................................320
Opener
Back door..................................................32
Fuel filler door......................................... 69
Hood..........................................................315
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding .........................58
Driving position memory.................. 43
Outside temperature display........... 277
Overhead console ...............................270
Overhead courtesy lights .................262
Overheating, Engine............................418
P Parking brake.......................................... 129
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs........................366
Switch ........................................................139
Wattage.................................................. 432
Personal lights
Personal lights..................................... 262
Switch ......................................................266
Wattage.................................................. 432
Power outlet............................................ 279
Power steering
Fluid .......................................................... 327
Power windows ........................................62
468
R Radiator.................................................... 325
Radio..........................................................209
RDS ............................................................. 210
Rear audio system................................ 235
Rear seat entertainment system
Audio CD/CD text.......................... 250
DVD video............................................. 241
Initial setting.......................................... 255
MP3 discs............................................... 251
Rear seat entertainment
system.................................................. 235
Replacing controller battery..........351
Video....................................................... 253
Video CD ............................................. 248
Rear seats
Adjustment .............................................. 40
Folding down ......................................... 40
Rear side marker lights
Wattage ..................................................432
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Wattage ..................................................432
Rear window defogger ......................206
Rear window wiper............................... 148
Replacing
Fuses........................................................ 353
Light bulbs ............................................ 366
Rear seat entertainment system
controller battery .............................351
Tires.......................................................... 402
Wireless remote control
battery ................................................. 349
Alphabetical index
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners................................................... 454
Roof luggage carrier ............................. 60
RSE
Replacing controller battery..........351
RSE ........................................................... 235
S Scuff lighting............................................262
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ....................... 48
Automatic Locking Retractor ........50
Child restraint system
installation ........................................... 100
Cleaning and maintaining the seat
belts.......................................................304
Emergency Locking Retractor......50
How to wear your seat belt..............47
How your child should wear the
seat belt.................................................... 51
Pregnant women, proper seat belt
use ............................................................50
Reminder light..................................... 394
Seat belt extenders................................ 51
Seat belt pretensioners.......................49
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)..... 455
Seat heaters............................................ 282
Seating capacity .....................................182
Seats
Adjustment...................................... 37, 40
Adjustment precautions ........... 39, 42
Child seats/child restraint system
installation............................................100
Cleaning................................................ 303
Driver’s seat position memory.......43
Flattening seatbacks............................38
Head restraint.........................................45
Properly sitting in the seat ................78
Seat heaters ..........................................282
Service reminder indicators ............. 132
Shift lever
Automatic transmission ....................123
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .................................... 413
Shopping bag hooks............................286
Side airbags............................................... 80
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Switch........................................................ 139
Wattage..................................................432
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding......................... 58
Mirror position memory....................43
Spare tire
Inflation pressure............................... 340
Spare tire................................................402
Spark plug................................................426
Specifications ......................................... 422
469
Alphabetical index
Speech command switch*
Speedometer
Speedometer........................................ 130
Steering
Column lock release ...........................121
Fluid .......................................................... 327
Steering wheel
Audio switches ................................... 233
Manual adjustment ..............................55
Power adjustment ................................56
Steering wheel position
memory.................................................. 43
Storage feature...................................... 267
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck.....420
Sun visors ................................................. 274
Sunshade
Roof ............................................................. 67
Switch
ECT SNOW switch ..........................125
Engine switch.........................................120
Fog light switch.....................................142
Ignition switch........................................120
Light switches........................................139
Power back door switch....................32
Power door lock switch.....................27
Power window switch........................ 62
Rear window wiper and washer
switch .................................................... 148
Window lock switch ........................... 62
Wipers and washer
switch .....................................................143
470
T
Tachometer
Tachometer............................................130
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 366
Switch........................................................139
Wattage ..................................................432
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...........................................................74
Engine immobilizer system.............. 72
Theft prevention labels...........................77
Tire inflation pressure .........................340
Tire information
Glossary .................................................. 441
Size........................................................... 438
Tire identification number..............437
Uniform tire quality grading......... 439
Tires
Chains.......................................................183
Checking................................................332
If you have a flat tire ......................... 402
Inflation pressure ............................... 340
Inflation pressure sensor ............... 333
Information ........................................... 436
Replacing .............................................. 402
Rotating tires.........................................332
Size........................................................... 430
Snow tires................................................183
Spare tire ............................................... 402
Alphabetical index
Tools .......................................................... 402
Total load capacity.................................182
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................................198
Emergency towing ...........................380
Trailer towing........................................ 188
TRAC..........................................................164
Traction control ......................................164
Trailer towing.......................................... 188
Trip information display.......................136
Trip meter..................................................130
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................366
Switch........................................................128
Wattage ................................................. 432
V Valet key......................................................22
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................................275
Wattage ................................................. 432
Vanity mirrors ............................................275
Vehicle identification number .........423
Vehicle stability control.......................164
Video mode............................................ 253
VSC .............................................................164
W Warning buzzers
Brake system......................................... 391
Key reminder ...................................... 396
Open door ...........................................394
Open moon roof reminder ......... 396
Seat belt reminder.............................394
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system...................392
Automatic headlight leveling
system ..................................................392
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature warning light .........392
Brake assist system...........................392
Brake system......................................... 391
Charging system................................392
Dynamic laser cruise control master
warning light .....................................394
Electronic engine control
system ..................................................392
Engine oil replacement reminder
light ........................................................394
Low engine oil pressure.................392
Low fuel level .......................................394
Low tire pressure warning
light ........................................................394
Low washer fluid ................................394
Open door............................................394
Pretensioners.......................................392
Rear light failure..................................392
Seat belt reminder light...................394
SRS airbags...........................................392
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
471
Alphabetical index
Washer
Checking .................................................331
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................................... 183
Switch ........................................................143
Washing and waxing.......................... 300
Weight
Cargo capacity.....................................179
Load limits ...............................................182
Weight .................................................... 422
Wheels ......................................................344
Window glasses ......................................62
Window lock switch ...............................62
Windows
Power windows..................................... 62
Rear window defogger ..................206
Washer.....................................................143
Windshield wipers................................. 143
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ......................349
Wireless remote control key...........24
WMA disc ...............................................222
472
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 402 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
If the engine will not start
P. 72 Engine immobilizer system
P. 415 If the vehicle battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 413
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
P. 418
If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 414
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 415
If the vehicle battery is discharged
P. 27
P. 32
Side doors
Back door
P. 74
Alarm
P. 412
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
The doors cannot be locked
The horn begins to sound
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 420 If the vehicle becomes stuck
473
What to do if...
The warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 391
If the warning light turns on
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
or
or
P. 391
P. 392
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
P. 394
“ABS” warning light
or
P. 392
Low fuel level warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 394
P. 394
Rear light failure warning
light
P. 392
P. 392
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
P. 392
SRS warning light
Open door warning light
P. 394
Tire pressure warning light
P. 394
Charging system warning
light
P. 392
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
Low washer fluid warning
light
P. 394
P. 392
474
Malfunction indicator lamp
P. 392
What to do if...
Dynamic laser cruise control master
warning light
P. 158
Engine oil replacement
reminder light
P. 394
475
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 315
Hood lock release lever
P. 315
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill)
Engine oil type
476
Fuel filler door
P. 69
Fuel filler door opener
P. 69
Back door opener
P. 32
Tire inflation pressure
P. 430
19.2 gal. (72.5L, 15.9 lmp.gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 70, 424
P. 430
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
With filter
6.4 (6.1, 5.4)
Without filter
6.0 (5.7, 5.0)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE-5W-30
P. 425
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising